JP7232044B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a lottery is executed according to set values.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is executed according to a set value (see Patent Literature 1).
In this gaming machine, the probability of a "big hit" occurring in the variable display game is determined according to the set value. In particular, setting values can be changed by operating setting switches.

JP-A-5-285258

However, there is a risk that the conventional game machine will lose interest in the game.
That is, in the conventional game machine, if it becomes possible to determine that the setting value has been changed based on the display mode of the display means when the setting value is changed, the player can predict the setting value. There is a possibility that the enjoyment of progressing the game while playing is lost, and the interest in the game is reduced.
An object of the present invention is to improve the amusement of games.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to a first aspect of the present invention includes lottery means for executing a lottery according to a set value, and display in a predetermined display mode after staying in a predetermined mode related to the set value. and means for changing the display mode of the display means to the display mode based on the backed-up information when a predetermined condition is satisfied without staying in the predetermined mode when power is turned on . When the power is turned on, if the predetermined condition is not satisfied without staying in the predetermined mode, the display mode of the display means changes to the display mode based on the backed up information.
In the gaming machine according to the first invention, when the player stays in the predetermined mode, the display mode of the display means becomes the predetermined display mode. In particular, when the power is turned on, even if the predetermined mode is not maintained, the display mode of the display means becomes the predetermined display mode when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
Thus, even when the predetermined mode is not maintained, the display mode of the display means can be the same display mode as when the predetermined mode is maintained by satisfying the predetermined condition.
Therefore, it becomes impossible for the player to determine whether or not the player has stayed in the predetermined mode based on the display mode of the display means.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the enjoyment of playing the game while predicting the set values, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game.
Here, the lottery means corresponds to the main control board 200 described later. The set value corresponds to a value (set value) set in a set value area described later. As the display means, a normal map display device, which will be described later, corresponds. As the predetermined display mode, a "failed pattern" to be described later corresponds. The predetermined condition corresponds to a symbol initialization condition described later.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a diagram showing the front of the game board, and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control system of a pachinko machine. 3 is an address map of a memory area used by the CPU 210. FIG. It is a figure which shows the content of a game state. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot symbol and the number of times of time reduction (game state to shift after the end of the jackpot game state). It is a diagram showing the variation time of the special symbols selected and set during the occurrence of each game state. 4 is a flowchart showing CPU initialization processing; 7 is a flowchart showing initialization processing at power return. 4 is a flowchart showing main loop processing; 7 is a flow chart showing saving processing at power-off. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing dynamic port output processing; 4 is a flowchart showing performance display device output processing. 8 is a flowchart showing setting-related processing; 4 is a flowchart showing switch management processing; It is a flow chart which shows normal figure starting ball detection processing. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 starting ball detection process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 starting ball detection process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process. It is a flow chart showing a special game management process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 special game management process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 special game management process. It is a flow chart showing a winning special game management process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation waiting process. It is a flow chart showing processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows processing during a special figure stop. It is a flow chart which shows a special prize opening pre-opening process. It is a flow chart showing a special winning opening opening control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a special electric service open/close switching process; It is a flow chart showing a special winning opening closing effective process. It is a flow chart showing a special winning opening opening end wait process. It is a flow chart showing a pre-opening process for the big winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flow chart showing a big winning opening opening control process at the time of a small hit. 10 is a flowchart showing a special electric service open/close switching process; It is a flow chart showing a big winning opening closing effective process at the time of a small hit. It is a flow chart showing a wait process for ending the big winning opening opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flow chart showing normal game management processing. It is a flow chart showing normal figure normal game management processing. It is a flow chart showing normal game management processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during normal figure stop. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessory opening control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing normal electric open/close switching processing; It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product closing effective processing. It is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product open end wait processing. 4 is a flowchart showing performance display device control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing sub timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command reception processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing prefetch command reception processing; 9 is a flow chart showing variation command reception processing. 9 is a flowchart showing stop command reception processing; 9 is a flowchart showing opening command reception processing;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1. FIG.

(Overall Configuration of Pachinko Machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine.
A pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, an integrated door unit 4, and a game board unit 10. - 特許庁
The outer frame unit 2, inner frame unit 3 and integrated door unit 4 are fixed to each other via a hinge mechanism. Thereby, the inner frame unit 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2 . Further, the integral door unit 4 can be opened and closed with respect to each of the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2 .
The outer frame unit 2 includes a rectangular frame (outer frame). The outer frame provided in the outer frame unit 2 is fixed to the island facilities of the game arcade.
The inner frame unit 3 includes a rectangular frame (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is arranged inside the outer frame unit 2 .

The integrated door unit 4 is formed in a rectangular door shape. The door unit 4 includes a transparent plate 4a arranged substantially in the center, a decorative portion 4b arranged around the transparent plate 4a, a tray unit 5 arranged below the transparent plate 4a, and a tray. and a firing handle 6 disposed laterally of the unit 5 .
The transparent plate 4a is formed in a flat plate shape from a transparent material such as resin or glass. The decorative portion 4b is made of a transparent or translucent resin material and has a shape that protrudes forward. At each upper corner of the decorative portion 4b, there is provided a sound removing portion 4c in which a speaker 22 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. Each sound removal part 4c is provided with a plurality of sound removal holes through which the sound output by the speaker 22 is passed. A frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the decorative portion 4b. The frame lamp 20 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The receiving tray unit 5 has a receiving tray 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls), and an effect button 5b and a rotary selector 5c provided on the front side of the receiving tray 5a.
The effect button 5b is formed in a substantially columnar shape and arranged so as to protrude upward from the tray unit 5. - 特許庁The effect button 5b can be pressed by the player (an operation of pressing downward). Inside the tray unit 5, a first operation detection switch 24 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a pressing operation of the effect button 5b is arranged. The first operation detection switch 24 outputs a first operation signal to the effect control board 300 (see FIG. 3) each time the effect button 5b is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called "jog dial") is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and arranged so as to surround the performance button 5b. The rotary selector 5c can be rotated by the player (rotated around the cylindrical axis). Inside the tray unit 5, a second operation detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) is arranged for detecting a rotation operation of the rotary selector 5c. The second operation detection switch 25 outputs a second operation signal to the effect control board 300 each time the rotary selector 5c is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60[°]).

A lending operation unit 7 is arranged on the upper surface of the tray unit 5 . The rental operation unit 7 has a ball rental button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to a CR unit (not shown) capable of reading and updating information recorded on the prepaid card. Then, when a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit, the remaining credits of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit are displayed on the count display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated while the prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the receiving tray 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded in the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls paid out, and the updated remaining frequency of the valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the return button 7b is operated while the prepaid card with the remaining credits of the valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit.
Here, as a prepaid cart, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a storage IC built-in medium, and the like correspond.
The shooting handle 6 can be rotated by the player. Inside the firing handle 6 is disposed a firing volume 410 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the angle at which the firing handle 6 is rotated. The shooting volume 410 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the detected angle to the payout control board 400 (see FIG. 3).

(Configuration of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front of the game board and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inner side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3 . Thereby, the game board unit 10 is arranged on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 . A player can visually recognize a later-described game board 11 (game area 30) through the transparent plate 4a. In this embodiment, a game area 30, which will be described later, is formed between the back surface of the transparent plate 4a and the front surface of the game board 11. As shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 10 includes a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various effect devices (main image display device 31, sub image display device 32, movable body unit, etc.).
The set plate is formed in a box shape with an open front side. An opening formed by a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the back plate of the set plate.
The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set board. The game board 11 is made of resin and formed in a flat plate shape. An opening (not shown) consisting of a through hole is provided at substantially the center of the game board 11 . The player can visually recognize the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set board.
Around the opening in the front of the game board 11, a game area 30 is formed in which game balls shot out according to the rotation operation of the shooting handle 6 flow down. In the game area 30, a left path formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right path formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 are configured as paths along which game balls flow down. there is
Also, in the game area 30 of the game board 11, a board surface lamp 21 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The board lamp 21 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set plate. The main image display device 31 is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display. The main image display device 31 has a display screen 31a capable of displaying effect images.
On the display screen 31a, a production symbol display area A (not shown) corresponding to the special figure 1 display device (first special symbol) described later, and a special figure 2 display device (second special symbol) described later. It is possible to configure a performance symbol display area B (not shown).
Each production design display area A, B displays three first production design display areas a1 to a3 in which a first production design z1 (not shown) and a second production design z2 (not shown) are displayed. and one second effect symbol display area a4.
The first production pattern z1 includes identification information (symbols) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters. In each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the first effect symbol z1. The second effect pattern z2 is composed of a color bar. In the second effect symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the second effect symbol z2.
The variable display of the production designs z1 and z2 means that the first production design z1 is moved (scrolled) in each of the first production design display areas a1 to a3, and the second production design displayed in the second production design display area a4. 2 Refers to a display in which the type of effect pattern z2 is changed (the color represented by the color bar is changed sequentially).
The stop display of the production patterns z1 and z2 means that the first production pattern z1 of one kind is stopped at the lottery result display position of each of the first production design display areas a1 to a3, and the second production design display area a4. , a display in which one type of second effect pattern z2 is displayed (a color bar represents a predetermined color).
Then, in the production design display area A, the first production design z1 stop-displayed in the three first production design display areas a1 to a3, and the second production design z2 stop-displayed in the second production design display area a4. , the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed.
In addition, in the production design display area B, a first production design z1 stopped and displayed in the three first production design display areas a1 to a3, and a second production design z2 stopped and displayed in the second production design display area a4. , the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed.
Further, on the display screen 31a, reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2 (not shown) in which reserved symbols h (not shown) are displayed can be configured.
A reserved design h corresponding to special figure 1 game information, which will be described later, is displayed in the reserved design display area b1. In the reserved design display area b2, a reserved design h corresponding to special figure 2 game information, which will be described later, is displayed.

The sub-image display device 32 is arranged on the front side of the main image display device 31 .
The sub-image display device 32 is composed of a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT display. The sub-image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying effect images.
The sub-image display device 32 can be vertically displaced (moved) by a driving mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub-image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including an origin position (see FIG. 2) and an effect position (not shown) below the origin position. .
The sub image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the origin position is arranged above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub-image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the rendering position is arranged on the front side of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and covers part of the display screen 31a.

A first starting port 51 is provided in the left path. The first starting port 51 is a ball-entering port (so-called “navel”) that opens upward, and is always capable of entering a game ball. The first starting port 51 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
In the first start port 51, a special figure 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The special figure 1 starting port switch 101 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball entered into the first starting port 51 (entering the game ball into the first starting port 51) Output. The main control board 200 executes the first special symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 .

On the left side of the first starting opening 51 in the left path, there are provided an upper left other winning opening 57a, a middle left winning opening 57b, and a lower left winning opening 57c. Each of the other prize winning openings 57a to 57c is a ball entrance opening upward, and game balls can be entered at all times. The game balls flowing down the left path can be entered into each of the other winning holes 57a to 57c (the game balls flowing down the right path cannot be entered).
The game board 11 is provided with a left winning slot switch 106 (see FIG. 3). The left winning port switch 106 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the other winning ports 57a to 57c (entering the game ball to the other winning ports 57a to 57c). Output. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the left winning hole switch 106 .

A starting gate 41 is provided at the most upstream of the right path. The starting gate 41 is formed so that game balls can always pass through it. The starting gate 41 allows passage of game balls flowing down the right path (impossibility of passage of game balls flowing down the left path).
The starting gate 41 is provided with a gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3). The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the start gate 41 (passage of the start gate 41 by the game ball). The main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104 .

A first big winning port 54 is provided downstream of the starting gate 41 in the right path. The first big winning hole 54 has a closed state that makes it impossible for a game ball to enter the first big winning hole 54 and an open state that makes it possible for a game ball to enter the first big winning hole 54. and a first special electric accessory (special electric role) 54a that can be displaced.
The first special electric accessory 54a is opened and closed by the first big winning opening solenoid 65a (see FIG. 3). In the first big winning port 54, the first special electric accessory 54a is normally in a closed state, and it is impossible to enter the game ball, but a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or When a "jackpot" is won by the second special symbol lottery), the first special electric accessory 54a is opened to allow the entry of game balls. The first big winning hole 54 allows entry of game balls flowing down the right path (impossibility of entry of game balls flowing down the left path).
A first count switch 103a (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the first big winning hole 54. As shown in FIG. The first count switch 103a sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball entering the first big winning hole 54 (entering the game ball into the first big winning hole 54). Output. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the first count switch 103a.
In addition, in the first big prize opening 54, there are a V area (not shown), a discharge area (not shown), and a game ball that entered the first big prize opening 54, the V area and the discharge area. A sorting means (not shown) for sorting to one of the regions is provided.
A V-region switch 110 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the V-region. The V area switch 110 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the V area (passage of the game ball through the V area). Triggered by the input of the detection signal from the V area switch 110, the main control board 200 sets "1" in the V prize flag area of the RAM 230, which will be described later.
The sorting means has a V passing state in which game balls that have entered the first big prize opening 54 are sorted into the V area, and a non-V passing state in which game balls that have entered the first big prize opening 54 are sorted into the discharge area. and can be displaced.
That is, when the sorting means is displaced to the V passage state, all the game balls entering the first big winning hole 54 are sorted to the V area. This makes it impossible for the game ball entering the first big winning hole 54 to pass through the ejection area.
On the other hand, when the sorting means is displaced to the non-V-passing state, all the game balls entering the first big winning hole 54 are sorted to the discharge area. This makes it impossible for the game ball entering the first big winning hole 54 to pass through the V area.
The diverting means is displaced by a V-region solenoid 66 (see FIG. 3).
A game ball that has entered the first big prize hole 54 is first detected by the first count switch 103a, and then distributed to one of the V region and the discharge region by the distribution means. After passing through, it is discharged to the discharge path. At this time, the game balls distributed to the V area are detected by the V area switch 110 .

A second starting port 52 is provided downstream of the first big winning port 54 in the right path. The second starting port 52 is a ball-entering port (so-called “navel”) that opens upward, and is always capable of entering a game ball. The second starting port 52 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
Inside the second starting port 52, a first special figure 2 starting port switch 102a (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The first special figure 2 starting port switch 102a sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that entered the second starting port 52 (entering the game ball to the second starting port 52) Output for The main control board 200 executes the second special symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the first special figure 2 starting port switch 102a.

A third starting port 53 is provided below the second starting port 52 in the right path. The third starting port 53 has a closed state that makes it impossible for a game ball to enter the third starting port 53, and an open state that allows a game ball to enter the third starting port 53. A displaceable ordinary electric accessory (ordinary electric role) 53a is provided.
The normal electric accessory 53a is opened and closed by a normal electric accessory solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). In the third start port 53, the normal electric accessory 53a is normally in a closed state, making it impossible to enter a game ball. 53a is opened and a game ball can be entered. The third starting port 53 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
Inside the third starting port 53, a second special figure 2 starting port switch 102b (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The second special figure 2 starting port switch 102b sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that entered the third starting port 53 (entering the game ball to the third starting port 53) Output for The main control board 200 executes the second special symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the second special figure 2 starting port switch 102b.

A second big winning opening 55 is provided on the downstream side of the third starting opening 53 in the right path. The second big winning hole 55 has a closed state that makes it impossible for a game ball to enter the second big winning hole 55 and an open state that makes it possible for a game ball to enter the second big winning hole 55. and a second special electric accessory (special electric role) 55a that can be displaced.
The second special electric accessory 55a is opened and closed by a second prize winning opening solenoid 65b (see FIG. 3). In the second big prize winning port 55, the second special electric accessory 55a is normally closed and the game ball cannot be entered, but a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or When a "small win" is won by the second special symbol lottery), the second special electric accessory 55a is opened and the game ball can be entered. The second big winning port 55 allows entry of game balls flowing down the right path (impossibility of entry of game balls flowing down the left path).
A second count switch 103b (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the second big winning hole 55. As shown in FIG. The second count switch 103b sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball entering the second big winning hole 55 (entering the game ball into the second big winning hole 55). Output. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the second count switch 103b.

A right other prize winning port 56 is provided on the downstream side of the second big winning port 55 in the right path. The right other prize winning port 56 is a ball entrance opening upward, and is always capable of entering a game ball. The right other prize winning port 56 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
A right prize winning port switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the right other prize winning port 56 . The right winning opening switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the other right winning opening 56 (entrance of a gaming ball into the other right winning opening 56). . The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the right winning opening switch 105 .

At the most downstream of the game area 30, an out port 58 is provided for discharging game balls that have not entered (won a prize) in any of the winning ports 51 to 56 and 57a to 57c.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which game balls discharged from the game area 30 pass. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3 . The pachinko machine 1 is configured such that all game balls hit into the game area 30 (all game balls discharged from the game area 30) pass through the discharge path. That is, the game ball launched into the game area 30 is discharged from the game area 30 by entering any of the winning openings 51 to 56, 57a to 57c or by passing through the out opening 58, flow into the discharge channel.
Specifically, the game balls entering the winning holes 51 to 56 and 57a to 57c are detected by the switches 101, 102a, 102b, 103a, 103b, 105, 106, and 110 provided in the winning holes. Later, it is guided to the discharge channel. Also, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 is guided to the discharge path.
The inner frame unit 3 is provided with an out switch 109 (see FIG. 3). Then, the out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the discharge path (a game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all game balls ejected from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109 .
Furthermore, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game balls to the respective winning holes 51 to 56, 57a to 57c and the starting gate 41. As shown in FIG.

A main display device 60 is arranged on the game board 11 . The main display device 60 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light-emitting element (LED in this embodiment).
Information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60 .
The main display device 60 includes a special figure 1 display device, a special figure 2 display device, a normal figure display device, a special figure 1 reservation display device, a special figure 2 reservation display device, a general figure reservation display device, and a round It is configured including a display device, a right-handed display device, a variable probability display device, and a time saving display device.
Specifically, the main display device 60 includes 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32).
And, in the main display device 60, LED1 ~ LED8 constitutes a special figure 1 display device, LED7 ~ LED16 constitutes a special figure 2 display device, LED17, 18 constitutes a general figure display device, LED19 ~LED23 constitutes a round display device, LED24 constitutes a right-handed display device, LED25 and 26 constitute a special figure 1 reservation display device, LED27 and 28 constitute a special figure 2 reservation display device Then, the LEDs 29 and 30 constitute a normal figure holding display device, the LED 31 constitutes a variable probability display device, and the LED 32 constitutes a time saving display device.

The special figure 1 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 1 display device, the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed by the stopped and displayed first special symbol.
The special figure 2 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the second special pattern consisting of numbers, patterns, and the like. Then, in the special figure 2 display device, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by the stopped and displayed second special symbol.
Here, the display of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device and the display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 in the effect symbol display area A are the time when the variable display is started, the time when the stop display is started, and , are associated with each of the lottery results indicated by the stopped symbols.
In addition, the display of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device and the display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 in the effect symbol display area B are the time when the variable display is started, the time when the stop display is started, and Each of the lottery results indicated by the stopped symbols is associated with each other.
Then, when the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (jackpot symbol), or the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device ( When the stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (big win symbol), a big win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.
In addition, when the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed in the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (small hit symbol), or the second special symbol stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 display device When the (stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (small winning symbol), a small winning game state which is a game state advantageous to the player is generated.
The normal pattern display device can perform variable display and stop display of normal patterns consisting of numbers, patterns, and the like. Then, in the normal pattern display device, the results of the normal pattern lottery are displayed by the stopped normal symbols. Then, when the normal pattern stopped and displayed on the normal pattern display device becomes a specific pattern (normal pattern per pattern), the normal pattern per game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.

The special figure 1 reservation display device displays the number of times (special figure 1 reservation number) that the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is reserved.
The special figure 2 reservation display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is withheld (the number of special figure 2 reservations).
The normal pattern lottery holding display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is held (the number of normal pattern holdings).
The round display device displays the number of round games executed during the big win game state or the small win game state (the type of the big win game state or the type of the small win game state).
The right hitting display device displays the path (left path or right path) along which the game ball should be hit.
The variable probability display device displays the game state at the time of power return (while the special figure high probability state is occurring or the special figure low probability state is occurring).
The current game state (executing or stopping the time saving control) is displayed on the time saving display device.

Also, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with one or a plurality of movable units (not shown). In this embodiment, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with one or a plurality of movable units, and the game board unit 10 is provided with one or a plurality of movable units.
Each movable unit of the integrated door unit 4 is arranged on the front surface of the decoration part 4b, the upper surface of the tray unit 5, etc., and can perform a predetermined performance operation.
Each movable unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set board. Specifically, each movable body unit is arranged in a space (hereinafter referred to as “effect space”) between the game board 11 and the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a). Each movable body unit can perform a predetermined performance action in the performance space.
Each movable body unit includes an effect member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 26 (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 3) is used as a drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. Note that a configuration using a solenoid as a driving source may be employed.
The effect member can be displaced along a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the effect member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and a effect position. The effect member is driven (displaced) by a motor 23 .

The position detection sensor 26 is configured by a photosensor or the like. A position detection sensor 26 detects the position of the production member. Specifically, the position detection sensor 26 includes a light projecting section and a light receiving section that receives light projected from the light projecting section. Then, the position detection sensor 26 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 in accordance with the light reception (detection) of the light projected from the light projection section by the light reception section. On the other hand, the position detection sensor 26 stops outputting the detection signal to the performance control board 300 when the light receiving section does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light projecting section.
A shield plate is provided at a predetermined position of the effect member. Then, when the effect member is arranged at the initial position, the shielding plate is arranged between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the position detection sensor 26 to block light from entering the light receiving part. Thereby, when the production member is arranged at the initial position, the output of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 26 to the production control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the production member is not arranged at the initial position, a detection signal is output from the position detection sensor 26 to the production control board 300 .
Thereby, the effect control board 300 can detect whether or not the effect member is arranged at the initial position depending on the input state of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 26 .

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with detection sensors for detecting various abnormal states.
In this embodiment, a glass frame opening sensor 107, an inner frame opening sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, and the like are arranged as detection sensors.
The glass frame open sensor 107 detects opening of the integrated door unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3 . Then, the glass frame open sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in accordance with the opening of the integrated door unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3 .
The inner frame open sensor 108 detects opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2 . Then, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 according to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2 .
The vibration detection sensor 113 detects vibration of the game board 11 . In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is arranged on the game board 11 . Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of vibration of the game board 11 .
The radio wave detection sensor 114 detects radio waves generated around the game board 11 . In this embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are arranged on the game board 11 . Each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of radio waves.
The magnetism detection sensor 115 detects magnetism generated around the game board 11 . In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is arranged in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). Also, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged on the game board 11 . Then, the magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to detection of magnetism. Further, each magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged on the game board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in accordance with detection of magnetism.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is an address map of a memory area used by the CPU 210. As shown in FIG.
The pachinko machine 1 includes various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 supplies power (electric power) to the main control board 200, the performance control board 300, the payout control board 400, and the respective control boards 200, 300, 400, etc. It has a plurality of control boards such as a power supply board 600, a driver board 310, a sub-connection board 320, and the like.
The plurality of control boards 200, 300, 400, 600 are independent (separate) circuit boards. Further, each control board 200, 300, 400, 600 is accommodated in a separate board case (main board case 250, etc., which will be described later).
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10 . Specifically, the main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11 .
The payout control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3 . Specifically, the payout control board 400 is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3 .

(Configuration of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be described.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 includes a one-chip microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer), a clock generation circuit 202, a random number generation circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, and a sink. It includes a driver 240, source drivers 250a and 250b, and the like.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI integrated with a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, and the like.

The main control board 200 includes a memory area used by the CPU 210 . As shown in FIG. 4, the memory area used by the CPU 210 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230. .
Here, in FIG. 4, addresses for specifying memory areas are shown in hexadecimal numbers ("H" indicates hexadecimal numbers).

The ROM 220 (memory area of the ROM 220) includes a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and an unused area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 includes a program area, an unused area, and a data area. The program area stores a program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game. The data area stores data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game. Note that the used area m1 may be configured without an unused area.
The unused area m2 includes a program area and a data area.
In the program area, a program (program code) for executing processing related to the test defined by the gaming machine regulations and a program (specifically, calculating the base ratio) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (program code) and are stored. The data area stores data (program data) for executing processing related to tests defined by gaming machine regulations and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 .
In addition to the use area m1 and the non-use area m2, the ROM 220 also includes an unused area, a ROM comment area, a program management area, and the like.
Arbitrary data such as program titles and versions are stored in the ROM comment area. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
Further, in the ROM 220, an unused area m3 of predetermined bytes (for example, 16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area m1 and the unused area m2. This clarifies the boundary between the use area m1 and the non-use area m2.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) includes a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and an unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The use area M1 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. Note that the used area M1 may be configured without including an unused area.
Specifically, the work area includes a set value area, a gaming machine status flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error related area, a normal game related area 1, and a normal game related area 2. is composed of
A setting value is stored in the setting value area. A gaming machine status flag is stored in the gaming machine status flag area. A checksum is stored in the checksum area. A backup flag is stored in the backup flag area. Information about errors is stored in the error-related area. The normal game-related area 1 stores a sub-command pointer and the like. The normal game-related area 2 stores input/output data in the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), lottery results, flags for managing the game state, and the like. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 stores the game information acquired triggered by the input of the detection signal from each of the special figure 1 starter switch 101, the special figure 2 starter switches 102a and 102b, and the gate switch 104 Area (game information storage area to be described later), a special figure 1 display pattern counter, a special figure 2 display pattern counter, a general figure display pattern counter and the like.
The unused area M2 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests defined by game machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). It is used as an area for temporarily storing various data. On the other hand, the stack area is during execution of a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests defined by gaming machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). In addition, it is used as an area to temporarily save various data.
Specifically, the work area includes a performance display related area. The performance display related area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during the execution of the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. FIG.
In addition, the RAM 230 is provided with an unused area M3 of predetermined bytes (16 bytes or more) between the used area M1 and the unused area M2. This clarifies the boundary between the use area M1 and the non-use area M2.

In this embodiment, it is permitted to refer to the data stored in the non-use area M2 in the process based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.
On the other hand, it is prohibited to rewrite (change) the data stored in the non-use area M2 by processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. there is
Also, in the process based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to the test specified by the game machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the use area It is permitted to refer to the data stored in M1.
On the other hand, by processing based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to the test specified by the game machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the use area The data stored in M1 is prohibited from being rewritten (changed).
A game in the pachinko machine 1 can be progressed (completed) by a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 [MHz] in this embodiment) and outputs this clock to the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203 respectively.
A random number generating circuit 203 includes a first loop counter for generating a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter for generating a big winning random number for the first special symbol lottery, and a second loop counter for generating a big winning random number for the second special symbol lottery. 3 loop counters.
The first loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A winning random number for a normal pattern lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).

The third loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).

The input port 204 includes a plurality of input ports (input port 0 to input port 3 in this embodiment).
Input port 0 receives a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107, a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108, a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113, a detection signal from one of the radio wave detection sensors 114, and a magnetic detection sensor 115. A detection signal or the like from is input.
Input port 1 receives a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and the like.
Input port 2 receives detection signals from count switches 103a and 103b, a detection signal from right winning slot switch 105, a detection signal from left winning slot switch 106, a detection signal from out switch 109, and the other radio wave detection sensor. A detection signal or the like from 114 is input.
To the input port 3, the detection signal from the special figure 1 starter switch 101, the detection signal from each special figure 2 starter switch 102a, 102b, the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the detection signal from the V area switch 110, etc. is entered.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (detection signal). In the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor, 1-bit data indicating the reception state of the detection signal from the switch/sensor is set.
Specifically, in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor, "1" is set when the detection signal from the switch sensor is input (high level). "0" is set when the detection signal from is not input (low level).

The output port 205 includes a plurality of output ports (output port 0 to output port 4 in this embodiment).
The output port 0 outputs data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 . A data signal output from the output port 0 is input to the source driver 250a.
The output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 . A common signal output from the output port 1 is input to the sink driver 240 .
Output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450 .
The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the drive of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the drive of the big winning opening solenoids 65a and 65b, and a control signal for controlling the V-region solenoid 66. etc.
The output port 4 outputs data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the performance display device 206 . A data signal output from the output port 4 is input to the source driver 250b.

Also, the main control board 200 is configured to include a command output port 1 and a command output port 2 . Then, the CPU 210 transmits a control command (subcommand) from the command output port 1 to the performance control board 300, and transmits a control command (payout command) to the payout control board 400 from the command output port 2. do.
Command output port 1 and command output port 2 each include a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), a transmission shift register (not shown), have.
The transmission data register outputs the control command input based on the subcommand transmission process (step S2-4) described later to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is composed of multiple registers and is capable of storing multiple control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the input order.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits it to the effect control board 300 or the payout control board 400 as serial data.

Performance display device 206 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light-emitting element (LED in this embodiment). It should be noted that the performance display device 206 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11, so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player.
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the state of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "game machine state") includes a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting error state, and a RAM error state. and a backup abnormal state are defined. The information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes according to the gaming machine state that has occurred.

The performance display device 206 includes four (four-digit) display units (not shown). Each display is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is composed of a 7-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot-segment LED capable of displaying dots such as a decimal point.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 includes 32 lighting elements (LED33 to LED64). In the performance display device 206, LED33 to LED40 are the first digit display section, LED41 to LED48 are the second digit display section, LED49 to LED56 are the third digit display section, and LED57 to LED64. is the fourth digit display.

A game can be played while the playable state is being generated. Then, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring.
In this embodiment, while the playable state is occurring, the performance display device 206 changes the first base ratio and the second base ratio every predetermined time (5.0 [s] in this embodiment). , are displayed alternately.
The “first base ratio” is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the current time).
The “second base ratio” is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio) is displayed by the upper two-digit display portion of the four-digit display portion. A number indicating the base ratio (percentage) is displayed by the lower two digits of the display.

While the setting change state is occurring, the setting value can be changed. While the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the setting change state is occurring is displayed by the display portion of the upper three digits of the display portion of the four digits (specifically, ""n." is displayed in the upper two digits, and "-" is displayed in the upper third digit. be done.
While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting value can be confirmed. While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is displayed by the display section of the upper three digits of the display section of four digits (specifically, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring (specifically, ""r" is displayed in the upper two digits, and "n." be.

The game cannot progress while the game stop state (setting error state, RAM error state, and backup error state) is occurring. While the game stop state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the game stop state is occurring is displayed by the display portion of the upper three digits of the display portion of four digits (specifically, the upper first digit indicates "E" is displayed in the upper two digits, "r." A number indicating the error code corresponding to the status) is displayed.

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. In other words, the RAM clear switch 207 includes an operation unit that can be pressed. The RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is pressed.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. In other words, the setting key switch 208 includes an operation section provided with a keyhole. The operation unit is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole, and can be rotated (switched) from the OFF state to the ON state. The setting key switch 208 outputs a detection signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is in the ON state.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of common signals to the respective display devices 60 and 206 according to the common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) output from the output port 1. FIG.
The source driver 250a controls the output of data signals to the main display device 60 according to the data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 0. FIG.
The source driver 250b controls the output of data signals to the performance display device 206 according to the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4. FIG.
Thus, the source driver 250a and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED1 to LED32) included in the main display device 60. FIG.
Also, the source driver 250b and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED33 to LED64) included in the performance display device 206. FIG.

The main control board 200 also includes a test signal output circuit (not shown).
CPU210, in the test signal output process (step S4-24) to be described later, to generate test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, execution state of time saving control, probability state of special symbol lottery, etc.) and stores the generated test signal in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from the predetermined output port. A test signal output from a predetermined output port is input to an interface board of a test computer (not shown) via a test signal output circuit.
Also, in the main control board 200, the detection signal from the special figure 1 starter switch 101, the detection signal from each special figure 2 starter switch 102a, 102b, the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the count switch 103a, 103b , the detection signal from the right winning slot switch 105, the detection signal from the left winning slot switch 106, the detection signal from the out switch 109, etc. , is input to the test computer interface board.
Furthermore, in the main control board 200, a control signal for controlling the driving of each solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64, big winning opening solenoids 65a, 65b, V area solenoid 66, etc.) output from the output port 3 is It is input to each solenoid 64, 65a, 65b, 66, and is also input to the interface board of the computer for testing via the test signal output circuit.

(Configuration of payout control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the payout control board 400 will be described.
The payout control board 400 controls the shooting of game balls to the game area 30 and the payout of game balls.
The payout control board 400 includes a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI integrated with a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control board 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit.
Also, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball shooting operation of the game ball shooting device 430 based on the detection signal input from the shooting volume 410 . Specifically, the shooting operation of the game ball by the game ball shooting device 430 is controlled so that the game ball is shot to the game area 30 with the intensity corresponding to the detection signal input from the shooting volume 410 .

(Configuration of production control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the effect control board 300 will be described.
The production control board 300 controls production.
The production control board 300 is configured including a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI integrated with a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a VDP, a sound processor, an illumination controller, a motor controller, and the like.
Based on the control command received from the main control board 200, the effect control board 300 displays the effect images on the various image display devices 31 and 32, turns on the various lamps 20 and 21, outputs sounds from the various speakers 22, and performs various movements. It controls the driving of the motor 23 that drives the body unit.

The ROM of the effect control board 300 stores a program relating to the progress of the effect, data necessary for the progress of the effect, and the like.
The RAM of the effect control board 300 temporarily stores control commands received from the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, and the like.
The CPU of the effect control board 300 determines the effect contents to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and sets the effect program (effect control table) corresponding to the determined effect contents.
The VDP generates display control data (display control signal) according to an effect program (effect control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated display control data to various image display devices 31 and 32 .
The sound processor generates sound control data (sound control signal) according to a performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and sends the generated sound control data to a digital audio power amplifier (not shown). Output. Then, the digital audio power amplifier generates control signals corresponding to the various speakers 22 based on the sound control data input from the sound processor, and transmits the generated control signals to the various speakers 22 via the sub connection board 320. Output for
The lighting controller generates lamp control data (lamp control signal) according to a production program (production control table) set by the CPU, and sends the generated lamp control data to the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320 respectively. Output for
The motor controller generates motor control data (motor control signal) according to an effect program (effect control table) set by the CPU, and sends the generated motor control data to each of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320. output.

The driver board 310 includes a motor driver (not shown) and a lamp driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, according to the motor control data input from the performance control board 300, the motor driver provides an excitation signal (drive current) output.
The lamp control data output from the effect control board 300 is input to the lamp driver. Then, the lamp driver controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element group of each system constituting the board surface lamp 21 according to the lamp control data input from the effect control board 300 .
The sub connection board 320 includes a motor driver (not shown) and a lamp driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, according to the motor control data input from the effect control board 300, the motor driver provides an excitation signal (drive current) output.
The lamp control data output from the effect control board 300 is input to the lamp driver. Then, the lamp driver controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element group of each system constituting the frame lamp 20 according to the lamp control data input from the effect control board 300 .

(Regarding gaming machine status)
In the pachinko machine 1, six states (specifically, playable state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting error state, RAM error state, and backup error state) are defined as gaming machine states. .
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a gaming machine state flag area. In the gaming machine status flag area, six gaming machine statuses (specifically, playable status, setting change status, setting confirmation status, setting error status, RAM error status, and backup error status) are displayed as gaming machine status flags. ), a value corresponding to any one gaming machine state is stored (set). Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a gaming machine state corresponding to the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is generated.
The "playable state" is a gaming machine state in which a game can be played.
Execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is permitted while the game-enabled state is occurring. As a result, the game (regular game and special game) can be progressed.
Also, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring. In addition, information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60 .

The “setting change state” is a game machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be changed.
The configuration change state occurs when the configuration change condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection from the RAM clear switch 207 The setting change condition is established when the signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting change state occurs. be done.
While the setting change state is occurring, execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Also, while the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Furthermore, by pressing the RAM clear switch 207 while the setting change state is occurring, the setting value stored in the setting value area can be changed. When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is determined.

The “setting confirmation state” is a game machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be confirmed.
The set-verify state occurs when the set-verify condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection from the RAM clear switch 207 The setting confirmation condition is met when no signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed, the setting confirmation state occurs. be done.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the setting confirmation state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Also, while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. This makes it possible to confirm the set value stored in the set value area. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Note that the set values stored in the set value area cannot be changed while the setting confirmation state is occurring.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting confirmation state.

The "setting error state" is a gaming machine state in which a setting error has occurred.
The abnormal setting state is generated when it is determined that the set value set in the set value area is not within the specified range while the playable state is being generated.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the setting error state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Further, while the abnormal setting state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the abnormal setting. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the setting error state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause a setting change state.

"RAM abnormal state" is a gaming machine state in which a RAM abnormality occurs.
The RAM abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a read/write abnormality has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
Execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the RAM abnormal state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Further, while the RAM abnormality state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the RAM abnormality. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the RAM abnormal state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause the setting change state.

The “backup abnormality state” is a gaming machine state in which a backup abnormality has occurred.
The backup abnormality state is generated when it is determined that a backup abnormality of the RAM 230 (specifically, a backup flag abnormality or a checksum abnormality) has occurred when the power is turned on.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the backup abnormal state is occurring. Thereby, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, while the backup abnormality is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the backup abnormality. Also, all the lighting elements that constitute the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the backup abnormal state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause a setting change state.

(About setting value)
Next, setting values (setting information) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "set value" is information that designates the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery). In this embodiment, values from "0" to "5" are defined as the set values.
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a set value area. Any one of "0" to "5" is stored (set) in the setting value area as the setting value. Then, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is determined according to the value set in the set value area.
In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "jackpot" by the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery) changes according to the value set in the set value area. On the other hand, the probability of winning a "small hit" by the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery) does not change according to the value set in the set value area. It should be noted that the probability of winning the "small hit" by the special symbol lottery may be configured to change according to the value set in the set value area, just like the probability of winning the "big hit" by the special symbol lottery. do not have.
The probability of winning the special symbol lottery corresponding to each setting value (probability of winning the "jackpot") is set to the winning probability corresponding to the setting value = "5" and the setting value = "4" in order from the highest winning probability. Winning probability corresponding to setting value = "3" Winning probability corresponding to setting value = "2" Winning probability corresponding to setting value = "1" Winning probability corresponding to setting value = "0" Winning probability (winning probability "high" → winning probability "low").

Especially, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the setting value stored in the setting value area while the setting change state is occurring. Here, the change of the setting value is executed by the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is opened, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting A modified state is raised.
While the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. Further, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the set value stored in the set value area is changed. At this time, when the setting value set in the setting value area is changed, the setting value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is determined.

(About base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, the base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210 while the playable state is occurring. In this embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only during the occurrence of a predetermined game state (specifically, during the occurrence of the special figure low probability state and during the stop of the time saving control).
Then, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring.
The "base ratio" is the number of game balls launched into the game area 30 and the number of game balls entering a predetermined ball entrance (in this embodiment, the start openings 51 to 53 and other winning openings 56, 57a to 57c). The information is calculated based on the number of prize balls paid out according to the number of incoming balls. Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts (the number of paid out prize balls) to the number of out balls (the number of game balls that have been hit).
In the present embodiment, the base ratio is calculated for each predetermined section (period). As the predetermined section, a section in which a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 60000 [balls]) of out balls is detected (discharged) is defined. That is, each section starts when the previous section ends, and ends when the number of out-balls detected during the current section reaches a predetermined number (60000 [balls]). Then, the CPU 210 calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each interval.
It should be noted that a predetermined period of time may be defined as the predetermined section. That is, the CPU 210 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
"Number of out balls" refers to the number of out balls. “Out ball” refers to a game ball ejected from the game area 30 . Specifically, the out ball is a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
In addition, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 may be used as an out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball discharged from the out port 58, and the game ball detected by the out switch 109 may be the out ball.
The "number of payouts" refers to the total number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the starting ports 51-53 and the other winning ports 56, 57a-57c.

(About game state)
Next, game states defined by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the contents of the game state.
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time-saving control as auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During execution of the time saving control, the probability of winning the "normal pattern" is improved by the normal symbol lottery to be described later, as compared with the time when the time saving control is stopped. That is, during stop of time saving control, it becomes a normal pattern low probability state, and during execution of time saving control, it becomes a normal pattern high probability state.
Then, while the time saving control is stopped (while the normal pattern low probability state is occurring), the probability of winning the "normal pattern hit" by the normal pattern lottery is set as the first probability. On the other hand, during execution of the time saving control (during the occurrence of the normal pattern high probability state), the probability of winning the "normal pattern hit" by the normal pattern lottery is set to the second probability higher than the first probability.
In addition, during the execution of the time saving control, compared to the stop of the time saving control, the time for performing the variable display of the normal symbol is shortened, and in the game state per normal figure described later, the normal electric accessory 53a is released. As the number of times is increased, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53a is extended. Furthermore, during the execution of the time saving control, the time for performing the variable display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "variation time") is shortened compared to when the time saving control is stopped.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a special symbol low probability state and a special symbol high probability state are defined as game states related to the probability of winning a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery) to be described later. It is
Then, the probability of winning the "jackpot" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery) changes during the occurrence of the special low probability state and the occurrence of the special high probability state. do.
That is, during the occurrence of the special symbol low probability state, the probability of winning the "jackpot" by special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is the first probability (probability according to the set value ). On the other hand, during the occurrence of the special symbol high probability state, the probability of winning the "jackpot" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is higher than the first probability ( probability according to the set value).
On the other hand, regarding the probability of winning the "small hit" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery), during the occurrence of the special symbol low probability state, during the occurrence of the special symbol high probability state, does not change with

As described above, as shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 1 defines four game states (specifically, "game state A" to "game state D").
"Game state A" is a game state in which the time saving control is stopped (general figure low probability state is occurring) and the special figure low probability state is occurring.
"Game state B" is a game state during execution of time saving control (during occurrence of general figure high probability state) and occurrence of special figure high probability state.
"Game state C" is a game state in which the time saving control is stopped (general figure low probability state is occurring) and the special figure high probability state is occurring.
"Game state D" is a game state during execution of time saving control (during the occurrence of normal figure high probability state) and occurrence of special figure low probability state.

(Regarding various lotteries)
Next, various lotteries executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot symbol and the number of times of time saving (game state to be shifted after the jackpot game state is completed).
In addition, FIG. 6(a) shows the winning type selected when the "jackpot" is won by the first special symbol lottery, and the number of time reductions corresponding to each winning type (game state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game state) , and FIG. 6(b) shows the winning type selected when the "jackpot" is won by the second special symbol lottery, and the number of time reductions corresponding to each winning type (after the end of the jackpot game state It shows the relationship between the transition game state) and.
In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed when a game ball passes through a starting gate 41.例文帳に追加
In the pachinko machine 1, as a result of the normal symbol lottery, "normal pattern winning" and "losing" are defined.
In the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern winning judgment) executed while the time saving control is stopped (normal pattern low probability state occurring), the probability of being judged as "normal pattern hit" (winning) is 1/65536. .
On the other hand, in the normal pattern lottery (ordinary pattern hit/loss determination) that is executed during the time saving control (during the occurrence of the normal pattern high probability state), the probability of being determined as "normal pattern hit" (winning) is 1/1 becomes.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, as the winning type (type of normal pattern per pattern) selected when "normal per pattern" is won by the normal pattern lottery, "normal per pattern 1"("per normal per pattern 1") is selected. ) is specified.
When "1 per normal pattern" is won, the normal pattern is controlled to be stopped and displayed at "1 per normal pattern" in the normal pattern display device.
On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is lost (in the case of "loss"), the normal symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed as "lost symbol" in the normal symbol display device.
When winning "per normal pattern 1", the normal per pattern game state is generated. Then, in the normal per game state, the normal electric accessory 53a is displaced (opened) from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the third start port 53.
In the normal per game state, the number of opening times of the normal electric accessory 53a is set to 1 [times] or 3 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53a at each time is 0.5 [s] or 2 .0 [s].
At this time, during execution of the time saving control, the number of opening times of the normal electric accessory 53a is set to 3 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53a at each opening is 2.0 [s ] is set.
On the other hand, while the time saving control is stopped, the number of opening times of the normal electric accessory 53a is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 53a at each opening is 0.5 [s]. is set to

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 51, and the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 53 or the third start hole 53. Triggered by, the second special symbol lottery is executed.
In the pachinko machine 1, "big win", "minor win" and "lose" are defined as the results of the first special symbol lottery. On the other hand, as a result of the second special symbol lottery, "big win", "minor win", and "lose" are defined.
In addition, as a result of the first special symbol lottery, the configuration may be such that the "small hit" is not specified.

The probability of winning the "small hit" by the first special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination) is 1/21. On the other hand, the probability of winning the "small hit" by the second special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination) is 1/1.4.
The probability of winning the "jackpot" by the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery and second special pattern lottery) is about 1/315 when the special low probability state is occurring, and the occurrence of the special high probability state In the medium case, it is about 1/140.
Here, as described above, the probability of winning the "big hit" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) varies according to the set value.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6(a), in the pachinko machine 1, "big win 1" and "big win 1" and " Jackpot 2” (jackpot pattern 1” and “jackpot pattern 2”) are defined. In addition, only "small hit 1"("small hit pattern 1") is defined as the winning type (small hit pattern type) selected when the "small hit" is won by the first special symbol lottery. .
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6(b), "big hit 3" and "big hit 4"(" Big hit pattern 3” and “big hit pattern 4”) are defined. In addition, only "small hit 1"("small hit pattern 1") is defined as the winning type (small hit pattern type) selected when "small hit" is won by the second special symbol lottery. .

When "jackpot 1" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "jackpot pattern 1" is stop-displayed on the special figure 1 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display area A, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "normal symbol" is stop-displayed.
Here, the "normal symbol" means, for example, that the first effect symbols z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 are the same, such as "2, 2, 2". The second production pattern z2 stop-displayed in the second production pattern display area a4 is displayed in a predetermined color while being aligned with "number patterns" showing even numbers.
When the "jackpot 2" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 2" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. In addition, in the effect symbol display area A, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "probability variation symbol" is stop-displayed.
Here, the "variable probability pattern" is, for example, the first production pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first production design display areas a1 to a3 is the same as "7, 7, 7". The second production pattern z2 stop-displayed in the second production pattern display area a4 is displayed in a predetermined color while being aligned with "number patterns" showing odd numbers.
When "big hit 3" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "big hit pattern 3" is stop-displayed on the special figure 2 display device. In addition, in the effect symbol display area B, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "hidden symbol" is stop-displayed.
Here, the "hidden symbol" is, for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and a predetermined number such as "1, 2, 3". A combination having regularity is obtained, and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 has a display mode in which a predetermined color is indicated.
When "jackpot 4" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "jackpot pattern 4" is stop-displayed on the special figure 2 display device. In addition, in the effect symbol display area B, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "hidden symbol" is stop-displayed.

On the other hand, when "small hit 1" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to "small hit pattern 1" is stopped in the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device or special figure 2 display device) Is displayed. In addition, in the effect symbol display areas A and B, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "small hit symbol" is stop-displayed.
Here, the "small winning design" is, for example, the first production design z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first production design display areas a1 to a3 is a predetermined number such as "7, 8, 7". and the second effect symbol z2 stop-displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 is in a display mode showing a predetermined color.
On the other hand, if you lose the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) (in the case of "missing"), in the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device or special figure 2 display device) , and the stop symbols (display mode) corresponding to the "missing symbols" are stopped and displayed. In addition, in the effect symbol display areas A and B, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "lost symbol" is stop-displayed.
Here, the "missing symbol" means, for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is stopped and displayed in at least one area such as "1, 6, 9". The number indicated by the displayed "number pattern" has a different combination from the number indicated by the "number pattern" stopped and displayed in the other area, and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. indicates a predetermined color.

When "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 4" are won, a jackpot game state is generated. Then, in the jackpot game state, the first special electric accessory 54a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the first big winning hole 54.例文帳に追加
Specifically, a predetermined number of round games are executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. At this time, when "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 4" are won, the number of round games is set to 10 [times].
In addition, when "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 4" are won, the longest opening time of the first special electric accessory 54a in each round game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment). ).
In each round game, (1) the longest opening time has elapsed since the first special electric accessory 54a was opened, and (2) to the first big winning port 54 during the execution of the round game. The number of game balls entered reaches a predetermined upper limit number (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]).

When ``jackpot 1'' to ``jackpot 4'' are won, the first round game among predetermined times of round games executed while the jackpot game state is occurring becomes a ``V round game''.
In the "V round game", the sorting means is displaced from the non-V passing state to the V passing state.
At this time, when "big win 1" or "big win 3" is won, it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball that enters the first big winning hole 54 during the execution of the V-round game to pass through the V area. In another aspect, the sorting means is displaced from the non-V-passing state to the V-passing state.
As a result, when "jackpot 1" or "jackpot 3" is won, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. Therefore, "jackpot 1" or "jackpot 3" is substantially a winning type in which a special figure high probability state is not generated after the jackpot game state ends.
On the other hand, when "jackpot 2" or "jackpot 4" is won, a game ball entered into the first jackpot 54 during execution of the V-round game can easily (possibly) pass through the V area. , the distribution means is displaced from the non-V-passing state to the V-passing state.
As a result, when the "jackpot 2" or "jackpot 4" is won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. Therefore, "jackpot 2" or "jackpot 4" is a winning type in which a special figure high probability state can occur after the jackpot game state ends.
Here, in the round games other than the V round game among the predetermined number of round games executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, the sorting means is displaced from the non-V passing state to the V passing state. never. This makes it impossible for a game ball entering the first big winning hole 54 to pass through the V area during the execution of the round game other than the V round game.

When passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected during the occurrence of the big win game state, the game state after the end of the big win game state is a special figure low probability state.
On the other hand, when passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the big win game state, the game state after the end of the big win game state is a special figure high probability state.
That is, when "jackpot 1" or "jackpot 3" is won, it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball that enters the first big prize opening 54 to pass through the V area during the execution of the V-round game. Become. As a result, the player can select the game state (special figure high probability state or special figure low probability state) after the big win game state according to how the game ball is launched during occurrence of the big win game state. can't That is, regardless of how the game ball is launched during occurrence of the big hit game state, the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes a special figure low probability state.
On the other hand, when the "big win 2" or "big win 4" is won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball entering the first big winning hole 54 to pass through the V area during the execution of the V-round game. . As a result, the player can select the game state (special figure high probability state or special figure low probability state) after the big win game state according to how the game ball is launched during occurrence of the big win game state. can be done.
The special figure high probability state is started in response to the end of the jackpot game state, and (1) the number of special figure hit determinations executed during the occurrence of the special figure high probability state is a predetermined probability variable number (in this embodiment , 10000 [times]) has been reached (the number of times of variable display of special symbols started during the occurrence of the special symbol high probability state has reached a predetermined number of times), and (2) the next big hit The game is terminated when one of the conditions of starting the game state (finishing the stop display of the "jackpot symbol") is met.
Here, when the condition (1) is satisfied, the special symbol high probability state is terminated at the start of the variable display of the special symbol of the predetermined probability variation number. On the other hand, when the condition (2) is satisfied, the special figure high probability state is terminated at the end of the stop display of the "jackpot design" (when the stop time elapses).
In addition, the special figure high probability state may be configured to be started according to the end of the big win game state and to be ended according to the start of the next big win game state (end of stop display of "big win pattern").

Here, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a limiter function.
The "limiter function" is a function that limits the number of times that the control that causes the special figure high probability state continues in response to the end of the jackpot game state.
Concretely, at the end of the big win game state, it is determined whether or not the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the big win game state.
When it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the V area, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the limiter number counter.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the V area, the value of the limiter number counter is incremented by "1", and thereafter the value of the limiter number counter is set to a predetermined reference value (this embodiment In the form, it is determined whether "4") has been reached. Then, when it is determined that the value of the limiter number counter has not reached a predetermined reference value, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is a special figure high probability state, while the value of the limiter number counter is When it is determined that the predetermined reference value is reached, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is a special figure low probability state. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the limiter number counter has reached a predetermined reference value, 0 [times] is set as the number of times of time saving.
As a result, when it is determined that the value of the limiter number counter has reached the predetermined reference value, the game after the end of the jackpot game state is played even though the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected. The state is a special pattern low probability state and a state where the time saving control is stopped (ordinary pattern low probability state).

Further, at the end of the jackpot game state, a predetermined number of times of time saving is set. After the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving control is executed according to the set number of times of time saving.
As shown in FIG. 6(a), when "jackpot 1" or "jackpot 3" is won, regardless of whether or not the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, Regardless of the game state at the time of execution of the special figure hit determination, 50 [times] is set as the number of times of time saving.
On the other hand, when the "jackpot 2" is won and the passing of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, 0 [times] or 10000 [times] is set as the number of time saving. set. At this time, if the game state at the time of execution of the special figure hit determination is "game state A", 0 [times] is set as the number of times of time saving, and the game state at the time of execution of the special figure hit determination is "game state B”, “game state C” or “game state D”, 10000 [times] is set as the number of times of time saving.
On the other hand, when the "jackpot 2" is won and the passing of the game ball through the V area is not detected during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, the number of times of time saving is 0 [times] or 100 [times]. is set. At this time, if the game state at the time of execution of the special figure hit determination is "game state A", 0 [times] is set as the number of times of time saving, and the game state at the time of execution of the special figure hit determination is "game state B”, “game state C” or “game state D”, 100 [times] is set as the number of times of time saving.

On the other hand, when the "jackpot 4" is won and the passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, 10000 [times] or 50 [times] is set as the number of times of time saving. set. At this time, if the game state at the time of execution of the special figure hit determination is "game state A", 10000 [times] is set as the number of times of time saving, and the game state at the time of execution of the special figure hit determination is "game state B”, “game state C” or “game state D”, 50 [times] is set as the number of times of time saving.
On the other hand, when "jackpot 4" is won and passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, the number of times of time saving is 100 [times] or 0 [times]. is set. At this time, if the game state at the time of execution of the special figure hit determination is "game state A", 100 [times] is set as the number of times of time saving, and the game state at the time of execution of the special figure hit determination is "game state B”, “game state C” or “game state D”, 0 [time] is set as the number of times of time saving.

When 0 [times] is set as the number of times of time saving, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends.
On the other hand, when 1 [times] or more is set as the number of times of time saving, time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state.
Time saving control is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, (1) The number of times of special figure hit determination executed during the time saving control has reached the set time saving number (started during the time saving control (2) the start of the next big hit game state (the stop display of the "big hit pattern" has ended), It is terminated when one of the conditions is met.
Here, when the condition (1) is established, the time saving control is terminated at the start of the variable display of the special symbols for the set number of times of time saving. On the other hand, when the condition (2) is established, the time saving control is terminated at the end of the stop display of the "jackpot symbol" (when the stop time elapses).

When "small win 1" is won, a small win game state is generated. Then, in the small winning game state, the second special electric accessory 55a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 55.例文帳に追加
Specifically, during the occurrence of the small winning game state, a predetermined number of small winning games are executed. At this time, when "small win 1" is won, the number of small win games is set to 1 [times].
In addition, when "small hit 1" is won, the longest opening time of the second special electric role product 55a in each small win game is set to a predetermined time (1.8 [s] in this embodiment). be done.
Furthermore, when the "small win 1" is won, the second big winning hole 55 is opened in each small win game. That is, in each small winning game, the second special electric accessory 55a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 55.例文帳に追加
In each small winning game, the longest opening time has passed since the second special electric role 55a was opened, and the number of game balls to the second big winning port 55 during the execution of the small winning game. The game ends when one of the following conditions is satisfied: that the number of hit balls reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 [balls] in this embodiment).
Here, before and after the small hit game state, the game state (special figure low probability state/special figure high probability state, execution/stop of time saving control) does not change.

(Regarding the fluctuation time of special symbols)
Next, the variation time of the special symbols selected and set during the occurrence of each game state (“game state A” to “game state D”) will be described.
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the variation time of special symbols selected and set during the occurrence of each game state.
FIG. 7(a) shows the variation time of the special symbols selected/set during the occurrence of the "game state A", and FIG. 7(b) shows the selection/set during the occurrence of the "game state B". FIG. 7(c) shows the variation time of the special symbols selected and set during the occurrence of the "game state C", and FIG. 7(d) shows the "game state D ” indicates the variation time of the special symbol selected and set during the occurrence.

The variation time (variation mode/variation pattern) of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) at the time of "big hit" is selected by the winning variation pattern determination process described later. Then, in the winning variation pattern determination process, the reservation type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the game state ("game state A" to "game state D"), and the type of stop pattern, Based on, the variation time (variation mode/variation pattern) of the special symbol is selected.
On the other hand, the variation time (variation mode/variation pattern) of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) at the time of "missing" is selected by the losing variation pattern determination process to be described later. Then, in the losing fluctuation pattern determination process, the reservation type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of reservations (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number), and the game state ("game state A” to “game state D”), the variation time (variation mode/variation pattern) of the special symbol is selected.
On the other hand, the variation time (variation mode/variation pattern) of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) at the time of "small hit" is the winning variation pattern determination process and the losing variation pattern determination process. , is selected by either processing. At this time, based on the game state ("game state A" to "game state D") and the pending type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), variation pattern determination processing at the time of winning, and One process is selected from among the fluctuation pattern determination processes at the time of losing.
Thereby, in order to determine the variation time (variation mode/variation pattern) of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) at the time of "small hit", it is not necessary to provide a dedicated process, simplifying the process. become possible.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7(a), when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state A" is "small hit", at the time of defeat The variation time of the first special symbol is selected by the variation pattern determination process. As a result, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state A" is a "small hit" and a "loss", and the variation performance The aspects (contents) can be the same.
On the other hand, if the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state A" is "small hit", the variation of the second special symbol by the variation pattern determination process at the time of winning time is selected. As a result, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state A" is a "small hit" and a "big hit", depending on whether the variable production is performed. The aspects (contents) can be the same.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state B" is "small hit", variation pattern at the time of winning The variation time of the first special symbol is selected by the determination process. As a result, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state B" is a "small hit" and a "big hit", and the variation performance The aspects (contents) can be the same.
On the other hand, if the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state B" is "small hit", the variation of the second special symbol by the variation pattern determination process at the time of defeat time is selected. As a result, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state B" is a "small hit" and a "loss", depending on the variation effect The aspects (contents) can be the same.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7 (c), when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state C" is "small hit", variation pattern at the time of winning The variation time of the first special symbol is selected by the determination process. As a result, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state C" is a "small hit" and a "big hit", depending on whether the variable production is performed. The aspects (contents) can be the same.
On the other hand, if the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state C" is "small hit", the variation of the second special symbol by the variation pattern determination process at the time of winning time is selected. As a result, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state C" is a "small hit" and a "big hit", and the variation effect The aspects (contents) can be the same.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7 (d), when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state D" is "small hit", the fluctuation pattern at the time of winning The variation time of the first special symbol is selected by the determination process. As a result, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state D" is a "small hit" and a "big hit", and the variation production is performed. The aspects (contents) can be the same.
On the other hand, if the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state D" is "small hit", the variation of the second special symbol by the variation pattern determination process at the time of defeat time is selected. As a result, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state D" is a "minor hit" and a "loss", depending on the variation effect The aspects (contents) can be the same.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, as groups of special symbol variation modes (variation modes/variation pattern combinations), there are "normal variation", "long variation A", "long variation B", and "short variation". , are defined as “dedicated variations”.
"Normal fluctuation" is a group to which fluctuation modes associated with normal fluctuation times belong. In this embodiment, 4.0 [s] to 180.0 [s] are defined as the variation time (normal variation time) corresponding to each variation mode belonging to the "normal variation".
"Long fluctuation A" is a group to which fluctuation modes associated with longer fluctuation times (hereinafter referred to as "long fluctuation time A") than fluctuation modes belonging to other groups belong. In this embodiment, 590.0 [s] is defined as the fluctuation time (long fluctuation time A) corresponding to each fluctuation mode belonging to "long fluctuation A".
“Long fluctuation B” is a group to which fluctuation modes associated with a longer fluctuation time (hereinafter referred to as “long fluctuation time B”) than normal fluctuation time belong. In this embodiment, the variation time (long variation time B) corresponding to each variation mode belonging to "long variation B" is selected when the variation mode belonging to "normal variation" (especially "jackpot 3" is won. A longer time (specifically, 200.0 [s]) is defined as compared with the longest variation time among the variation times (ordinary variation times) corresponding to the variation mode).
"Short fluctuation" is a group to which fluctuation modes associated with fluctuation times that are shorter than normal fluctuation times (hereinafter referred to as "short fluctuation times") belong. In this embodiment, 3.0 [s] to 6.0 [s] are defined as the variation time (short variation time) corresponding to each variation mode belonging to "short variation".
The "dedicated variation" is a variation mode dedicated to when a "minor win" or "loss" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the "game state C". In the present embodiment, a shorter variation time (specifically, 0.5 [s]) is defined as the variation time corresponding to each variation mode belonging to the "dedicated variation" compared to the short variation time. .

As shown in FIG. 7(a), the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state A" is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" , "Normal fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time falls within the range of 4.0 [s] to 180.0 [s]. At this time, if the result of the special hit determination is "big hit", the variation mode corresponding to "big hit" among the variation modes belonging to "normal variation" (variation time = 120.0 [s] to 180.0 [s]) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the special hit determination is "small hit" or "loss", the variation mode corresponding to "loss" among the variation modes belonging to "normal variation" (variation time = 4. 0 [s] to 180.0 [s]) is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state A" is "big hit", "small hit" or "missing", as a variation mode, "long Variation A” is selected. As a result, the variable time becomes 590.0 [s].
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state B" is "big hit", "small hit" or "loss" , "long variation B" is selected as the variation mode. As a result, the variable time becomes 200.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state B" is "jackpot", the variation mode is "normal variation" (belonging to "normal variation" Among the variation modes, a variation mode corresponding to the "big win" is selected. As a result, the fluctuation time falls within the range of 120.0 [s] to 180.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state B" is "small hit" or "loss", "short variation" is selected as the variation mode be done. As a result, the fluctuation time falls within the range of 3.0 [s] to 6.0 [s].
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(c), the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state C" is "big hit", "small hit" or "loss" , "long variation B" is selected as the variation mode. As a result, the variable time becomes 200.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state C" is "jackpot", the variation mode is "normal variation" (belonging to "normal variation" Among the variation modes, a variation mode corresponding to the "big win" is selected. As a result, the fluctuation time falls within the range of 120.0 [s] to 180.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state C" is "minor hit" or "loss", "exclusive variation" is selected as the variation mode be done. As a result, the fluctuation time becomes 0.5 [s].
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(d), the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state D" is "big hit", "small hit" or "loss" , "long variation B" is selected as the variation mode. As a result, the variable time becomes 200.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state D" is "jackpot", the variation mode is "normal variation" (belonging to "normal variation" Among the variation modes, a variation mode corresponding to the "big win" is selected. As a result, the fluctuation time falls within the range of 120.0 [s] to 180.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state D" is "small hit" or "loss", "short variation" is selected as the variation mode be done. As a result, the fluctuation time falls within the range of 3.0 [s] to 6.0 [s].

(Regarding game state transition)
Next, the game state transition will be described.
As shown in FIG. 6(a), "jackpot 1" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during occurrence of "game state A" to "game state D", and the jackpot game state When the passing of the game ball through the V area is detected during occurrence, the game state after the big win game state ends becomes "game state B".
On the other hand, "big hit 1" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during occurrence of "game state A" to "game state D", and V area by game ball during occurrence of big win game state. is not detected, the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes "game state D".
Here, as described above, when "jackpot 1" is won, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. Therefore, it becomes impossible for the player to intentionally select whether or not the game ball passes through the V area during the occurrence of the jackpot game state.
Therefore, when "jackpot 1" is won on the basis of the first special symbol lottery, passage of the game ball through the V area is not substantially detected during occurrence of the jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state is realized. The game state after the end of is set to "game state D".

When a ``jackpot 2'' is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the ``game state A'', and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. , the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes "game state C".
On the other hand, "jackpot 2" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed while "game state B", "game state C" or "game state D" is occurring, and the jackpot game state is occurring. When the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected in the second stage, the game state after the big win game state is ended becomes "game state B".
On the other hand, a ``jackpot 2'' is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the ``game state A'', and passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. In this case, the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes "game state A".
On the other hand, "jackpot 2" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed while "game state B", "game state C" or "game state D" is occurring, and the jackpot game state is occurring. If the passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected at the beginning, the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes "game state D".
Here, as described above, when the "jackpot 2" is won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to intentionally select whether or not the game ball passes through the V area during the occurrence of the big win game state.
Therefore, when the "jackpot 2" is won based on the first special symbol lottery, the method of progressing the game by the player (during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, the game is advanced so that the game ball passes through the V area) (whether to play or not), the game state after the jackpot game state ends changes. At this time, if the game progresses so that the game ball passes through the V area, the game state after the big win game state is finished is advantageous to the player.

A ``jackpot 3'' is won based on a second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of a ``game state A'' to a ``game condition D'', and a game ball passes through a V area during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. is detected, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes "game state B".
On the other hand, "big hit 3" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "game state A" to "game state D", and the V area by the game ball during the occurrence of the big win game state. is not detected, the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes "game state D".
Here, as described above, when "jackpot 3" is won, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. Therefore, it becomes impossible for the player to intentionally select whether or not the game ball passes through the V area during the occurrence of the jackpot game state.
Therefore, when "big hit 3" is won based on the second special symbol lottery, substantially no passing of the game ball through the V area is detected during occurrence of the big win game state, resulting in a big win game state. The game state after the end of is set to "game state D".

A ``jackpot 4'' is won based on a second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of a ``game state A'' to a ``game condition D'', and a game ball passes through a V area during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. is detected, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes "game state B".
On the other hand, "jackpot 4" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed while the "game state A" is occurring, and passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. In this case, the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes "game state D".
On the other hand, "jackpot 4" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during occurrence of "game state B", "game state C" or "game state D", and the jackpot game state is occurring. If the passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected at the beginning, the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes "game state A".
Here, as described above, when "jackpot 4" is won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to intentionally select whether or not the game ball passes through the V area during the occurrence of the big win game state.
Therefore, when the "jackpot 4" is won based on the second special symbol lottery, the method for progressing the game by the player (while the jackpot game state is occurring, the game is advanced so that the game ball passes through the V area (whether to play or not), the game state after the jackpot game state ends changes. At this time, if the game progresses so that the game ball passes through the V area, the game state after the big win game state is finished is advantageous to the player.

(Regarding game progress)
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
In the pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning a 'small win' is higher than the probability of winning a 'big win' in a special pattern lottery (a first special pattern lottery or a second special pattern lottery). In particular, the probability of winning the "small hit" by the second special symbol lottery is higher than the probability of winning the "small hit" by the first special symbol lottery.
As a result, by acquiring more opportunities for the second special symbol lottery, it becomes easy to continuously generate the small winning game state in a short time, and based on the small winning game state, the ball output rate ( output rate) can be improved. On the other hand, it becomes difficult to cause the big win game state continuously in a short time, and it becomes difficult to improve the ball output rate based on the big win game state.
Here, the "putting rate (putting rate)" is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts (the number of paid-out prize balls) to the number of out-balls (the number of game balls put out).
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the significance of the small winning game state as an opportunity to improve the ball output rate (increase the number of balls held) is increasing. On the other hand, the jackpot game state has less significance as an opportunity to improve the ball output rate (increase the number of balls in possession), and has a greater significance as an opportunity to shift to a more advantageous game state.

During the occurrence of the "game state A", the probability of winning the "normal pattern winning" by the normal symbol lottery is low (1/65536 in this embodiment). As a result, even if the game ball that has entered the right path passes through the start gate 41, the possibility of the normal game state occurring is low, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the third start port 53. Become.
On the other hand, the second starting port 52 is a ball-entry port (so-called “navel”) that opens upward, and a game ball can be entered at all times. As a result, regardless of the game state (“game state A” to “game state D”), it is easy to acquire the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery.
However, as described above, when the second special symbol lottery is executed while the "gaming state A" is occurring, the "long variation time A" is set as the variation time of the second special symbol regardless of the lottery result. (Specifically, 590.0 [s]) is selected.
As a result, even if an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery is obtained during the occurrence of the "game state A", the variable display of the special symbols takes a long time, so that the small winning game state can be continued in a short time. Therefore, it becomes difficult to improve the ball output rate based on the small winning game state.
Therefore, during the occurrence of the "game state A", a game is played with the aim of shifting to a more advantageous game state by winning the "jackpot" by the first special symbol lottery and causing the jackpot game state. will proceed.
In particular, when a ``small hit'' is won by the first special pattern lottery executed while the ``game state A'' is occurring, the game ball is shot when the ``small prize pattern 1'' is stopped and displayed. Even if the path is changed from the left path to the right path, the game ball entering the right path does not reach the second big winning hole 55 by the end of the small winning game state.
As described above, while the "game state A" is occurring, the game ball is launched to the left side path in order to acquire the opportunity of the first special symbol lottery.
When a ``jackpot 1'' is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the ``game condition A'', the game condition after the completion of the jackpot game condition usually becomes a ``game condition D''. In this case, after that, the number of times of the special figure per judgment executed after the end of the jackpot game state reaches the number of time saving times (specifically, 50 [times]) (by the special figure per judgment (Except when a "jackpot" is determined), the game moves to a "game state A".
On the other hand, when the "jackpot 2" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the "game state A", the game state after the jackpot game state ends normally becomes the "game state C". .

During the occurrence of the "game state B", the probability of winning the "normal pattern hit" by the normal symbol lottery is high (1/1 in this embodiment). As a result, every time the game ball entering the right path passes through the start gate 41, a normal game state is generated, and the game ball enters the third start port 53 easily.
As a result, while the "game state B" is occurring, it is possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the reduction of the number of balls in hand.
In addition, when the second special symbol lottery is executed while the "game state B" is occurring, the "long variation time A" (specifically, 590.0 [s ]) is never selected.
As a result, during the occurrence of the "game state B", it becomes easy to continuously generate the small winning game state in a short time.
However, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 55 while the “game state B” is occurring.
That is, as described above, during the occurrence of the "game state B", the probability of winning the "general pattern per" by normal symbol lottery is high probability (in this embodiment, 1/1), so the right side Every time the game ball that has entered the path passes through the start gate 41, a game state per normal pattern is generated and the third start port 53 is opened.
As a result, while the "game state B" is occurring, the game ball that has entered the right path passes through the starting gate 41, enters the third starting port 53, and moves to the downstream side of the third starting port 53. It does not reach the arranged second big winning opening 55. - 特許庁
Therefore, while the "game state B" is occurring, it becomes easy to continuously generate the small winning game state in a short time, but it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 55.例文帳に追加As a result, it becomes difficult to improve the ball output rate based on the small winning game state.
As described above, while the "game state B" is occurring, the game ball is launched toward the right path with the aim of shifting to the "game state C" which is a more advantageous game state.
When "big win 3" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed while "game state B" is occurring, the game state after the end of the big win game state usually becomes "game state D". In this case, after that, the number of times of the special figure per judgment executed after the end of the jackpot game state reaches the number of time saving times (specifically, 50 [times]) (by the special figure per judgment (Except when a "jackpot" is determined), the game moves to a "game state A".
On the other hand, when "jackpot 4" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed while the "game state B" is occurring, the game state after the jackpot game state ends normally becomes the "game state B". . In this case, after that, the number of times of the special figure per judgment executed after the end of the jackpot game state reaches the number of time saving times (specifically, 50 [times]) (by the special figure per judgment (Except when a "jackpot" is determined), the game moves to "game state C".

When the second special symbol lottery is executed while the "game state C" is occurring, the second special symbol variation time is "long variation time A" (specifically, 590.0 [s]). is never selected.
As a result, during the occurrence of the "game state C", it becomes easy to continuously generate the small winning game state in a short time.
In particular, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 55 while the “game state C” is occurring.
That is, during the occurrence of the "game state C", the probability of winning the "normal pattern winning" by the normal symbol lottery is low probability (1/65536 in this embodiment), so the game entered the right path Even if the ball passes through the starting gate 41, there is a low possibility that the per-normal game state will occur, and the possibility that the third starting port 53 will be opened is low.
As a result, while the "game state C" is occurring, the game ball that has entered the right path passes through the starting gate 41, passes through the third starting port 53, and reaches the downstream side of the third starting port 53. It reaches the arranged second big winning opening 55 .
Therefore, during the occurrence of the "game state C", it becomes easy to continuously generate the small winning game state in a short time, and it becomes easy to enter the game ball into the second big winning hole 55.例文帳に追加As a result, it becomes easy to improve the ball output rate based on the small winning game state.
As described above, during the occurrence of the "game state C", a game ball is launched to the right path in order to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery with the aim of generating more small winning game states. It will be.
When "big win 3" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed while "game state C" is occurring, the game state after the big win game state ends usually becomes "game state D". In this case, after that, the number of times of the special figure per judgment executed after the end of the jackpot game state reaches the number of time saving times (specifically, 50 [times]) (by the special figure per judgment (Except when a "jackpot" is determined), the game moves to a "game state A".
On the other hand, when "jackpot 4" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed while the "game state C" is occurring, the game state after the jackpot game state ends normally becomes the "game state B". . In this case, after that, the number of times of the special figure per judgment executed after the end of the jackpot game state reaches the number of time saving times (specifically, 50 [times]) (by the special figure per judgment (Except when a "jackpot" is determined), the game moves to "game state C".

During the occurrence of the "game state D", the probability of winning the "normal pattern hit" by the normal symbol lottery is high (1/1 in this embodiment). As a result, every time the game ball entering the right path passes through the start gate 41, a normal game state is generated, and the game ball enters the third start port 53 easily.
As a result, while the "game state D" is occurring, it is possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the reduction of the number of balls in hand.
Also, when the second special symbol lottery is executed while the "game state D" is occurring, the variation time of the second special symbol is "long variation time A" (specifically, 590.0 [s ]) is never selected.
As a result, during the occurrence of the "game state D", it becomes easy to continuously generate the small winning game state in a short period of time.
However, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 55 while the “game state D” is occurring.
That is, as described above, during the occurrence of the "game state D", the probability of winning the "general pattern per" by normal symbol lottery is high probability (in this embodiment, 1/1), so the right side Every time the game ball that has entered the path passes through the start gate 41, a game state per normal pattern is generated and the third start port 53 is opened.
As a result, while the "game state D" is occurring, the game ball that has entered the right path passes through the starting gate 41, enters the third starting port 53, and moves to the downstream side of the third starting port 53. It does not reach the arranged second big winning opening 55. - 特許庁
Therefore, while the "game state D" is occurring, it becomes easy to continuously generate the small winning game state in a short time, but it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 55.例文帳に追加As a result, it becomes difficult to improve the ball output rate based on the small winning game state.
As described above, while the "game state D" is occurring, a game ball can be launched toward the right path with the aim of shifting to the more advantageous game state "game state B" or "game state C". become.
When a ``jackpot 3'' is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed while the ``game condition D'' is occurring, the game condition after the completion of the jackpot game condition usually becomes a ``game condition D''. In this case, after that, the number of times of the special figure per judgment executed after the end of the jackpot game state reaches the number of time saving times (specifically, 50 [times]) (by the special figure per judgment (Except when a "jackpot" is determined), the game moves to a "game state A".
On the other hand, when "jackpot 4" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "game state D", the game state after the jackpot game state is usually ended becomes "game state B". . In this case, after that, the number of times of the special figure per judgment executed after the end of the jackpot game state reaches the number of time saving times (specifically, 50 [times]) (by the special figure per judgment (Except when a "jackpot" is determined), the game moves to a "game state C".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the "game state C" among the "game state A" to "game state D" is the most advantageous game state for the player based on the ball output rate. In other words, among "game state A" to "game state D", "game state C" is the rate (probability・Possibility) becomes the highest gaming state. Furthermore, in other words, among "game state A" to "game state D", "game state C" is the game state in which the player is most advantageous during the occurrence of the game state.
Therefore, during the occurrence of "game state A", "game state B" or "game state D", the game is progressed with the aim of shifting to "game state C".

(About simultaneous fluctuation of special symbols)
In the pachinko machine 1, the notification display of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device (variation display and stop display) and the notification display of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device (variation display and stop display) It is possible to execute them concurrently (simultaneously).
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state is occurring, and one of the special figure 1 game information (first special symbol) and the special figure 2 game information (second special symbol) For the game information (special design), if the "big hit design" is not displayed (during the stop time), the other game information is determined to start (special design hit determination, special design design determination, special design variation pattern determination, etc. ) can be executed.

In particular, of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information, at the time of executing the start determination based on one of the game information, for the other game information, when the "big hit pattern" is being displayed (during the fluctuation time) , The result of the start determination based on the one game information cannot be “big hit” (“big hit pattern”) or “small hit” (small hit pattern), and is forced to “lose” (“lose”). Design").
For example, at the time of execution of start determination based on the first game information, if it is during the fluctuation display (during the fluctuation time) based on the second game information in which the "big hit pattern" is determined by the start determination, based on the first game information The result of the start determination is forcibly set as "missing"("missingpattern").
On the other hand, of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information, when the start determination is executed based on one of the game information, the other game information is displayed while changing the "small hit pattern" or "losing pattern" (fluctuation time), the result of the start determination based on the one game information is not forced.
Here, in this embodiment, of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information, at the time of execution of the start determination based on one of the game information, the other game information is displayed while the "big hit pattern" is fluctuating (fluctuation During the time), in the start determination based on the one game information, special figure hit determination (special figure big hit determination and special figure small hit determination) is not executed.
However, of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information, at the time of executing the start determination based on one of the game information, for the other game information, when the "big hit pattern" is being displayed (during the fluctuation time) , In the start determination based on the one game information, after the special figure hit determination (special figure big hit determination and special figure small hit determination) is executed, the result of the special figure hit determination may be rewritten to "miss" I do not care.

Also, for one of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information, at the start of the stop display (stop time) of the "big hit pattern" or "small hit pattern", the other game information fluctuates If it is being displayed (during variable time), the game information of the other side is forcibly changed to "failed pattern", and then the variable display (variable time) is terminated and the stop display (stop time) is started.
For example, at the start of the stop display based on the first game information in which the "big hit symbol" is determined by the start determination, if the variable display based on the second game information is being performed, the variation based on the second game information is forced. The display is ended, and the stop display based on the second game information is started. At this time, regardless of the result of the start determination based on the second game information, the "missing pattern" is forcibly stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, for one of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information, at the start of the stop display (stop time) of the "lost pattern", for the other game information, during the fluctuation display (during the fluctuation time ), the variable display (variable time) is continued for the other game information.
Here, for one of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information, at the start of the stop display (stop time) of the "big hit design" or "small hit design", about the other game information, When the variable display is in progress (during the variable time), the measurement of the variable time for the other game information may be interrupted.
With such a configuration, measurement of the interrupted variation time is started for the other game information in accordance with the end of the big win game state or the small win game state for one of the game information. At this time, for one of the game information, while the big hit game state or the small hit game state is occurring, the measurement of the fluctuation time for the other game information is interrupted, but the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device or About the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the special figure 2 display device) and the variable display of the performance symbols in the production design display area (production design display area A or production design display area B) is continued.
Alternatively, for one of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information, at the start of the stop display (stop time) of the "big hit pattern", the other game information is displayed during fluctuation (during the fluctuation time ), the game information of the other side is forcibly changed to a "lost pattern", the variable display (fluctuation time) is ended, the stop display (stop time) is started, and the special symbol Of the 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information, for one game information, at the start of the stop display (stop time) of the "small hit pattern", for the other game information, it is being displayed (during the fluctuation time). In this case, the measurement of the variation time for the other game information may be interrupted.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the game state is changed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols as the simultaneous variation of the special symbols can be executed.
That is, during the execution of the time-saving control, the value of the time-saving counter is updated at the start of the variable display of each special symbol, and it is determined whether to end the time-saving control based on the value of the time-saving counter after the update. be done. And when it determines with complete|finishing time saving control, time saving control is complete|finished.
Also, during the occurrence of the special figure high probability state, the value of the probability variation counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special symbol each time, and the special figure high probability state is terminated based on the value of the probability variation counter after the update. It is determined whether or not to And, when it is determined to end the special figure high probability state, the special figure high probability state is terminated.

(Regarding control commands)
Next, control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 and control commands transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 will be described.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, the communication between the main control board 200 and the production control board 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control board 200 to the production control board 300, and the communication from the production control board 300 to the main control board 200 is Not done.
Each control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 consists of 1-byte upper data indicating the type of control command and 1-byte lower data indicating the content of the control command. there is
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the effect control board 300 by serial communication. When the effect control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 include a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command, a variation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, a game state designation command, a number of pending Designation command, opening designation command, round start designation command, round end designation command, ending designation command, V prize designation command, first look-ahead designation command, second look-ahead designation command, third look-ahead designation command, error designation command, demo designation Commands, set value specification commands, etc. are set.
The symbol type designation command is a command for designating the type of the stop symbol (one type out of "missing symbol", "small hit symbol 1" and "big hit symbol 1" to "big hit symbol 4"). The symbol type designation command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of special symbols. Here, the symbol type specifying command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information).

The variation mode specification command is a command that specifies the type of variation mode (variation mode number). The variation mode specification command specifies the variation time associated with the variation mode number by specifying the variation mode number. The variation mode designation command designates the variation time of the first half period (form of the first half of the variation performance) of the variation display (variation performance) of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, m (plurality) types are set as the types of variation modes, each of which is associated with a different variation time. Then, the variation mode specifying command specifies one (“variation mode m”) of the m kinds of variation mode types (variation mode numbers).
The variation pattern specification command is a command that specifies the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number). The variation pattern specification command specifies the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by specifying the variation pattern number. The variation pattern specification command specifies the variation time of the second half period (mode of the second half period of the variation presentation) of the variation display (variation presentation) of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, n (plurality) kinds of fluctuation pattern types are set, each of which is associated with a different fluctuation time. Then, the variation pattern specification command specifies one (“variation pattern n”) of the n types of variation pattern types (variation pattern numbers).
The variation mode designation command and the variation pattern designation command are transmitted at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

The stop designation command is a command for designating the stop display of special symbols (effect symbols z1, z2). The stop designation command is transmitted at the start of stop display of special symbols. Here, the stop designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information).
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
Here, the "game state offset value" is information specifying the game state. In this embodiment, as the gaming state offset value, the value of the time saving control flag, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the last big hit design flag, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit, each combination A corresponding number is set.
The game state designation command designates one game state offset value. The game state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when changing the special game phase, which will be described later, or the like.

The pending number designation command is a command for designating the pending number. In this embodiment, the pending number designation command designates that the pending number (Special Figure 1 pending number or Special Figure 2 pending number) has increased by "1", the pending number has decreased by "1", the pending number, etc. .
Here, the "special figure 1 pending number" refers to the number of notice display (fluctuation display and stop display) of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device is reserved. In addition, the "special figure 2 pending number" refers to the number of notice display (fluctuation display and stop display) of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device is reserved.
The reserved number designation command is transmitted when power is turned on, when game information is stored, when variable display of special symbols is started, and the like. Here, the reserved number designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information).

The opening designation command is a command that designates the start of the opening period (the start of the small winning game state or the big winning game state). The opening designation command is the type of the small winning game state or the big winning game state to start (the type of the stop pattern (specifically, one of "small winning design 1" and "big winning design 1" to "big winning design 4"). type))). The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of the small winning game state or the big winning game state).
The round start designation command is a command for designating the start of a small winning game or a round game. A round start designation command is transmitted at the start of a small winning game or a round game.
The round end designation command is a command for designating the end of the small winning game or the round game. A round end designation command is transmitted at the end of a small winning game or a round game.
The ending designation command is a command that designates the start of the ending period. The ending specifying command is sent at the beginning of the ending period.
The V winning designation command is a command for designating detection of passage of the game ball through the V area. The V winning designation command is transmitted when the passing of the game ball through the V area is detected.

The first look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the type of stop design (one type out of "lost design", "small hit design 1" and "big hit design 1" to "big hit design 4"). Here, the first prefetch designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information).
The second look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the contents of the variation mode. Specifically, the second look-ahead designation command indicates that the type of variation mode is undefined ("undefined value"), or one of m types of variation modes (variation mode number) ("variation mode m" ). The second prefetch designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.
The third look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the contents of the variation pattern. Specifically, the third prefetch designation command is that the type of variation pattern is undefined ("undefined value"), or one of n types of variation patterns (variation pattern number) ("variation pattern n" ). The third prefetch designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.

The error designation command is a command that designates the occurrence of various errors. In this embodiment, the error designation command designates occurrence of vibration error, magnetic error, radio wave error, or right-handed hitting error. The error designation command is sent when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demonstration designation command is a command that designates the start of the customer waiting state. The demonstration designation command is sent at the start of the customer waiting state.
The setting value designation command is a command for designating the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 . The setting value designation command is transmitted when the RAM is cleared, when the power is restored after the power is turned on, when the setting change state ends, or when the setting confirmation state ends.

The main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is bidirectional. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 consists of 1-byte data.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command to the payout control board 400 by serial communication. In the payout control board 400, when a control command is received from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Also, the payout control board 400 transmits a control command to the main control board 200 by serial communication. In the main control board 200, when a control command is received from the payout control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.
In the pachinko machine 1, as a control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400, a command for designating the number of winning balls and the like are set.
The prize number designation command is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out. In this embodiment, the number-of-prizing-balls designation command designates the payout of n (n=1 to 15) prize balls. The prize ball number designation command is transmitted when the payout control board 400 executes the prize ball payout operation.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200 include the occurrence/cancellation of an error during payout, the occurrence/cancellation of a full tank error, the occurrence/cancellation of a jammed ball error, and the like. A control command specifying each is set. Each control command is sent upon detection of occurrence/release of various errors.

(Processing executed by main control board 200)
Next, processing executed by the main control board 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured on the main control board 200 will be described.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the random number generation circuit 203 starts the hardware random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 0.083 [μs] in this embodiment), the values of the first to third loop counters are changed within a predetermined range. (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) is updated by "1".
Further, in the hard random number update process, every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 2.666 [μs] in this embodiment), the value of the fourth loop counter falls within a predetermined range (this In the embodiment, it is updated by "1" in the range of 0 to 10006).
Then, the normal symbol lottery winning random number, the first special symbol lottery jackpot random number, and the second special symbol lottery jackpot random number are updated by the hardware random number update process. The hardware random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generation circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.
Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 transmit the control commands stored in the FIFO buffers to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400. Start control command transmission processing. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Next, game control processing executed by the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 based on the program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
(CPU initialization processing)
First, CPU initialization processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing CPU initialization processing.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 210 starts CPU initialization processing shown in FIG. The CPU initialization process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the CPU initialization processing is processing based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .

When the CPU initialization process is started, first, the process moves to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220, and settings necessary for executing various processes such as register settings are performed.
In the initial setting process, the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 are read.
Specifically, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read two times, and the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on based on the two read results. is occurring. Then, the determination result is stored as switch information for the RAM clear switch 207 . At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value (“1” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has occurred is stored as the switch information, and the ON state has occurred. If it is determined that the switch has not occurred, a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred is saved as the switch information.
Also, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is read two [times], and based on the reading result of the two [times], the ON state is generated for the setting key switch 208. Determine whether or not Then, the determination result is saved as switch information of the setting key switch 208 . At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value (“1” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has occurred is stored as the switch information, and the ON state has occurred. If it is determined that the switch has not occurred, a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred is saved as the switch information.
Furthermore, the value set in the receiving storage area corresponding to the inner frame open sensor 108 is read 2 [times], and based on the result of reading 2 [times], the inner frame open sensor 108 is turned on. is occurring. When it is determined that the ON state has not occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, wait processing time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 [s] in this embodiment) is set in the timer counter. As a result, measurement of the set wait processing time by the timer counter is started.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether or not the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has passed. If it is determined that the wait processing time has passed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4, If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the processing of step S1-3 is repeated.
In step S1-4, RAM access permission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, necessary processes are executed to permit access to the work area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to access permission is stored as a RAM protection value in the RAM access protection area of the RAM 230 . As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is permitted.

At step S1-5, a gaming machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is saved (loaded) in the D register.
At step S1-6, it is determined whether or not the backup valid flag is normal. If it is determined that it is not (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, when the value (backup valid flag) stored in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 is a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal, and the value stored in the backup valid flag area is not a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal.

In step S1-7, checksum calculation processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the use area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
Next, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-use area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal, and if it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-9, If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1 The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in -7 must match the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area." Judge that the checksum is normal.
On the other hand, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1- The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in step 7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area." If not, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-9, a clear target area setting process at power-on is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-10. In the power-on clear target area setting process, as a range to clear (initialize) the use area M1 of the RAM 230, areas other than the setting value area and the gaming machine state flag area (specifically, the checksum area, Backup valid flag area, error related area, normal game related area 1, normal game related area 2, and stack area) are set.
At step S1-10, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on. If it is determined that the ON state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is stored as switch information, it is determined that an ON state has occurred, and a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored. If so, it is determined that the ON state has not occurred.
In step S1-11, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-12, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register, it is determined whether or not the game ready state has occurred. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-13, and the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
The "setting confirmation condition" is that a game ready state has occurred, the RAM clear switch 207 has not been turned on, the setting key switch 208 has been turned on, and This is established when the frame open sensor 108 is in the ON state.
Here, in step S1-1, if the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that it is not turned on. As a result, when both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 are in the on state, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is in the on state is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. . On the other hand, if at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is not turned on is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. be done.
Therefore, in step 1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is stored as switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored. If so, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-13, a setting confirmation state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the setting confirmation state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting value confirmation state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, a process for setting an area to be cleared upon power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the clear target area setting process at the time of power return, as the range to clear (initialize) the use area M1 of the RAM 230, the set value area, the gaming machine state flag area, the normal game related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area Areas (specifically, checksum area, backup valid flag area, error-related area, and normal game-related area 1) are set.
In step S1-15, an initialization process at the time of power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. The power recovery initialization process will be described later.
In step S1-16, a subcommand transmission process at power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the power recovery subcommand transmission process, a subcommand designating recovery from power shutdown is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
In step S1-17, a payout command transmission process at power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process at the time of power recovery, a payout command designating recovery from power shutdown is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S1-18, a backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, a non-use area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the non-use area read/write check process, the non-use area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is performed.
In step S1-20, a process for setting an area to be cleared in the event of an abnormality is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-21. In the abnormality clear target area setting process, all areas (specifically, the setting value area, the gaming machine status flag area, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area).
In step S1-21, a used area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-22. In the used area read/write check process, the range set in step S1-20 in the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and read/write check is performed.
Specifically, in the used area read/write check process, of the used area M1 of the RAM 230, all areas (specifically, the set value area, gaming machine status flag area, checksum area, backup valid flag area, error related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area) are cleared (initialized).
Thereby, a predetermined initial value is set as the value of each counter for the special figure 1 display pattern counter, the special figure 2 display pattern counter, and the normal figure display pattern counter. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to the "lost pattern" is set as the predetermined initial value. That is, as the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the value corresponding to the "lost symbol" corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set, and as the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter, the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery. A value corresponding to the "missing pattern" is set, and a value corresponding to the "missing pattern" corresponding to the normal symbol lottery is set as the value of the normal pattern display symbol counter.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether or not the result of the read/write check performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 is normal. If it is determined that the result of the read/write check is not normal (No), , the process proceeds to step S1-23, and when it is determined that the result of the read/write check is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, RAM abnormality setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-24, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-25, and the setting is performed. If it is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-26.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred. Determine that no confirmation condition has occurred.
At step S1-25, a playable state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-26. In the playable state setting process, a value corresponding to the playable state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied.If it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-27, and the setting change condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (No), the process proceeds to step S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is that the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on, the setting key switch 208 is turned on, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is turned on. holds when
Here, as described above, when both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 are in the ON state, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 indicates that the ON state has occurred. Value is saved. On the other hand, if at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is not turned on is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. be done.
Therefore, in step 1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. .
At this time, if both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 store a value indicating that the ON state has occurred, the setting change condition is satisfied. I judge. On the other hand, if at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 stores a value indicating that the ON state has not occurred, the setting change condition is established. determine that it is not.

In step S1-27, a setting change state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
At step S1-28, a gaming machine state flag saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-29. In the gaming machine status flag saving process, the gaming machine status flag set in the D register is saved in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 .
At step S1-29, a RAM clear subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-30. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand designating that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
At step S1-30, the RAM clear initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-31. In the RAM clear initialization process, the RAM 230 is initialized. In the RAM clear initialization process, the range set in step S1-9 in the use area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
Specifically, in the RAM clearing initialization process, other areas (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the Error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area) are cleared (initialized).
Thereby, a predetermined initial value is set as the value of each counter for the special figure 1 display pattern counter, the special figure 2 display pattern counter, and the normal figure display pattern counter. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to the "lost pattern" is set as the predetermined initial value. That is, as the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the value corresponding to the "lost symbol" corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set, and as the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter, the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery. A value corresponding to the "missing pattern" is set, and a value corresponding to the "missing pattern" corresponding to the normal symbol lottery is set as the value of the normal pattern display symbol counter.
In step S1-31, a payout command transmission process when RAM is cleared is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process at the time of RAM clearing, a payout command specifying that the RAM clearing has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S1-32, a subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-33. In the subcommand setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command designating the current gaming machine state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the sub-command setting process, a sub-command output request of the RAM 230 outputs a power-on gaming machine state specifying command that specifies the gaming machine state flag (gaming machine state) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 . Store in buffer.
In step S1-33, a subcommand group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-34. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 .
Here, the sub-command group includes a sub-command for specifying the power recovery phase, a sub-command for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a sub-command for specifying the firing position, and a stop symbol of the first special symbol. Subcommand to specify the stop symbol of the second special symbol, subcommand to specify the special figure 1 reserved number, subcommand to specify the special figure 2 reserved number, subcommand to specify the value of the time saving counter, RAM230 subcommands for designating the setting values stored in the setting value area of .

At step S1-34, an initial display time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in the initial display timer.
At step S1-35, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, initial setting of a CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is performed.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, an interrupt vector register is set, and an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(Initialization processing when power is restored)
Next, the power recovery initialization process executed in step S1-15 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing initialization processing at the time of power return.
When the power return initialization process is executed in step S1-15, as shown in FIG. 9, the process first proceeds to step S28-1.
In step S28-1, initialization processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-3. In the initialization process, the range set in step S1-14 is cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230. FIG.
Specifically, in the initialization process, of the usage area M1 of the RAM 230, other areas (specifically, check Clear (initialize) the thumb area, backup valid flag area, error related area, and normal game related area 1).
Here, in the initialization process, the normal game-related area 2 is not cleared (initialized). Therefore, the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the value of the general figure display symbol counter are not cleared (initialized).

In step S28-2, it is determined whether or not the symbol initialization condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the symbol initialization condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-3, and the symbol initialization condition is determined. is not satisfied (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S1-16).
In this embodiment, as the symbol initialization condition, "a state in which the game is not being executed (a state in which the game is stopped)" is defined.
Specifically, as the symbol initialization condition, "a state in which the special game is not being executed (a state in which the special game is stopped), and a state in which the normal game is not being executed (a normal game is stopped state)” is stipulated.
Here, "the state in which the special game is not executed" means (1) that the first special symbol is not being displayed (during the fluctuation time) or stopped (during the stop time) in the special figure 1 display device. , (2) In the special figure 2 display device, the second special symbol is not being displayed (during the fluctuation time) or stopped (during the stop time), (3) The number of special figure 1 reservations = "0" (4) The number of special figures 2 reserved = "0", (5) Not occurring in the small hit game state or the big hit game state, all the conditions are satisfied.
"Normal game is not being executed" means (1) that normal symbols are not being displayed (during fluctuation time) or stopped (during stop time) on the normal pattern display device, (2) normal pattern It means a state that satisfies all the conditions, that the number of reservations=“0” and (3) that the per-normal game state is not occurring.

Specifically, in step S28-2, (1) in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area described later, a value corresponding to "special figure 1 fluctuation waiting state" is set, (2) special characteristics described later In the special game phase flag area in FIG. 2, a value corresponding to "special figure 2 fluctuation waiting state" is set, (3) in the special game phase flag area when winning, which will be described later, "special electric auditors non-operating state ”is set, (4) the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter described later = “0”, (5) the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter described later = “0” (6) In the general pattern normal game phase flag area described later, a value corresponding to "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state" is set, (7) in the normal pattern winning game phase flag area described later , that the value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory non-operating state" is set, (8) the value of the normal figure holding number counter described later = "0", if all the conditions are satisfied , it is determined that the symbol initialization conditions are satisfied.
On the other hand, if at least one of the above conditions (1) to (8) is not satisfied, it is determined that the symbol initialization condition is not satisfied.

In step S28-3, a symbol initialization process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S1-16). In the symbol initialization process, the value of each counter is cleared (initialized) for the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the general figure display symbol counter.
Specifically, in the symbol initialization process, a predetermined initial value is set as the value of each counter for the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the general figure display symbol counter. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to the "lost pattern" is set as the predetermined initial value. That is, as the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the value corresponding to the "lost symbol" corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set, and as the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter, the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery. A value corresponding to the "missing pattern" is set, and a value corresponding to the "missing pattern" corresponding to the normal symbol lottery is set as the value of the normal pattern display symbol counter.

(main loop processing)
Next, main loop processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main loop processing.
After completing the CPU initialization process (step S1-35) shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. The main loop processing is processing based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop processing is processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .
When the main loop process is started, first, the process moves to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, "initial value random number" is a random number for determining the initial value and end value of soft random numbers (hit pattern random numbers, reach mode random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, etc.) that are random numbers generated on the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates soft random numbers is updated within a preset range from the initial value to the end value. The initial value and end value of the loop counter that generates soft random numbers are changed each time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

At step S2-3, main command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the payout control board 400 (the control command transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200) is analyzed, and the process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, subcommand transmission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the effect control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
At step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. As a result, during the period from the execution of the interrupt permission process of step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibition process of step S2-1, the execution of the saving process at power shutdown, the timer interrupt process, etc. is permitted. This is the interrupt enabled period.
In step S2-6, another random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update process, the software random numbers excluding the hit pattern random numbers (specifically, reach mode random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Save processing when power is cut off)
Next, the power-off save process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the saving process at power-off.
The main control board 200 includes a power interruption detection circuit (not shown). The power cutoff detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600 and outputs a power cutoff warning signal to the input port 204 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
When the CPU 210 receives the power-off notice signal, the CPU 210 starts the power-off saving process shown in FIG. 11 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. The power-off save process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the saving process at power-off is a process based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .
When the power-off saving process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register saving process, the values of the registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in the saving area of the RAM 230 .
In step S3-2, power-off notice signal read processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cut-off notice signal reading process, the power cut-off notice signal is read from the power cut-off detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power-off notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power-off notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cut-off notice signal), whether the power cut-off notice signal is input from the power cut-off detection circuit. If it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and if it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has not been input (No), goes to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, output port stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop processing, output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped.
Specifically, in the output port stop processing, the values of all bits included in the port registers of the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) are initialized. This stops the output of control signals and control commands from the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4).
In step S3-5, a backup effective flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is stored (saved) in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 .

In step S3-6, checksum storage processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated and stored.
Specifically, in the checksum storage process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the use area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 . Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230 .
Next, based on the information stored in the non-use area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of RAM 230, a checksum is calculated. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, RAM access prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition processing, processing for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to access prohibition is stored as a RAM protection value in the RAM access protection area of the RAM 230 . As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

At step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of power-off notice signal reading times is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-9, power-off notice signal reading processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cut-off notice signal reading process, the power cut-off notice signal is read from the power cut-off detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power-off notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power-off notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal), whether the power cutoff notice signal is input from the power cutoff detection circuit. If it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and if it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has been input (Yes). goes to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, loop counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12. In the loop counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is "0". If it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is "0" (Yes), the CPU When it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, a register return process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the original process is returned to. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S3-1 is restored. After completion of the register return processing, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Timer interrupt processing)
Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The clock generation circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt period (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
In response to the generation of the interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop processing. The main loop processing is processing based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop processing is processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .
When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the process moves to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in the save area of the RAM 230 .
In step S4-2, interrupt permission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission processing, interrupts are permitted.

In step S4-3, dynamic port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. Dynamic port output processing will be described later.
In step S4-4, port input processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. The port input process acquires the state of each switch/sensor.
The RAM 230 is provided with an ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3).
In the port input process, it is determined whether or not each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3) is turned on. Here, the "on state" refers to a state in which the state in which the detection signal is not input (low level) changes to the state in which the detection signal is input (high level). At this time, based on the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor, it is determined whether or not the switch/sensor is in the ON state.
When it is determined that each switch/sensor is in the ON state, "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state has not occurred for each switch/sensor, "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor is referred to as the "switch bit data" of the switch/sensor.

At step S4-5, a gaming machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-7, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-9.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5, it is determined whether or not the game ready state has occurred. At this time, when the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state is generated, and when the acquired gaming machine state flag is not a value corresponding to the playable state, the gameable state is generated. determine that it is not.

In step S4-7, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that an abnormal state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-8, and the abnormal state is If it is determined that it has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-19.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to any one of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. If the obtained gaming machine state flag does not correspond to any one of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that the abnormal state has not occurred.

In step S4-8, setting-related processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. The setting-related processing will be described later.
In step S4-9, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, in the timer update process, the value of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.) is updated.
At step S4-10, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. The initial value random number update process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, a hit symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the winning symbol random number among the soft random numbers is updated.
In step S4-12, switch management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the switch management processing, processing (acquisition of various random numbers, etc.) is executed according to the state of each switch 101, 102a, 102b, 104, 110 (whether or not the ON state is detected). The switch management processing will be described later.

At step S4-13, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special figure display device (the special figure 1 display device and the special figure 2 display device) and the operation of the special electric auditors 54a and 55a are managed. Special game management processing will be described later.
In step S4-14, normal game management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. In the normal game management process, the operation of the normal diagram display device and the operation of the normal electric accessory 53a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.
At step S4-15, a state management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the state management process, various errors (abnormal states) are determined, and settings are made according to the determination result.
At step S4-16, a winning opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the prize-winning switch process, processes (such as updating various counters) are executed according to the states of the switches 101, 102a, 102b, 103a, 103b, 105, and 106 (whether or not the ON state is detected).

In step S4-17, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In this embodiment, as prize ball control counters, a prize ball control counter 1 storing the number of ball game balls entering the first big prize hole 54 and the number of ball game balls entering the second big prize hole 55 are provided. , a prize ball control counter 3 that stores the number of ball game balls that have entered other prize openings 56, 57a to 57c, and the number of ball game balls that have entered the first starting opening 51. A prize ball control counter 4 storing a number, a prize ball control counter 5 storing the number of ball game balls entering the second starting hole 52, and a number of ball game balls entering the third starting hole 53 A prize ball control counter 6 to be stored is set.

Then, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (15 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . Thereafter, when the game ball payout device 440 completes the payout of the prize balls, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command designating the completion of the payout to the main control board 200 . Then, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in accordance with the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is equal to or greater than "1", a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (10 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . Thereafter, when the game ball payout device 440 completes the payout of the prize balls, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command designating the completion of the payout to the main control board 200 . Then, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in accordance with the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is equal to or greater than "1", a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (4 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is equal to or greater than "1", a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (4 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is equal to or greater than "1", it generates a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 6 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is equal to or greater than "1", it generates a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 6 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

In step S4-18, a firing position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the firing position designation management process, processing related to designation of the firing position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when changing from the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the left path to the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the right path (at the start of the jackpot game state, etc.) , "1" is set in the shooting position specifying flag area of the RAM 230, and a subcommand specifying launching of the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is transmitted to the effect control board 300 .
On the other hand, when the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the right path is changed to the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the left path (at the end of the time saving control, etc.), " 0”.
In this embodiment, while the "game state A" is occurring, "0" is set in the shooting position specification flag area, and information specifying the left side path is displayed as the path to launch the game ball on the right-handed display device. be done.
On the other hand, while "game state B", "game state C", or "game state D" is occurring, "1" is set in the shooting position designation flag area, and the game ball is displayed on the right-handed display device as the path to be launched. , the right route information is displayed.

At step S4-19, an external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In this embodiment, the external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (an electronic device such as a hall computer, a data display device, etc.) includes information on the number of pattern determinations, starting gate information, jackpot information, security information, and an out gate. Payout number information, error occurrence information, etc. are defined.
"Symbol determination frequency information" is external information regarding the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation display and stop display of special symbols). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol determination frequency information to the hall computer (or data display device) every time the number of executions of the stop display of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number.
The “starting port information” is external information regarding entry of game balls into the starting ports 51-53. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the starting port information to the hall computer (or data display device) each time the ON state of the detection signal input from the starting port switches 101, 102a, and 102b is detected. do.

The "jackpot information" is external information about the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. The main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer (or data display device) each time a jackpot game state is generated.
The "outlet payout information" is external information regarding the number of game balls ejected from the ejection path (or the number of game balls ejected from the outlet 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the out-out slot payout number information to the hall computer each time the value of the out-ball number counter for external information reaches a predetermined value.
"Security information" is external information indicating that a setting change state is occurring, a setting confirmation state is occurring, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hole computer when the value of the security timer is "1" or more.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information determination number counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information fixed number counter has reached a predetermined value, the pattern fixed number information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information fixed number counter. As a result, pattern determination frequency information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry count counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [time] in the present embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the external information starting hole entry number counter has reached a predetermined value, the starting hole information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . After that, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the external information starting entrance number counter. As a result, starting point information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Also, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information jackpot frequency counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information jackpot frequency counter has reached a predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . Thereafter, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information jackpot number counter. As a result, jackpot information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information out-ball number counter has reached a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information out ball number counter has reached a predetermined value, the out outlet payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . Thereafter, a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information out-ball number counter. As a result, out-port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Also, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the game ready status.
Then, it is determined that the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is not a value corresponding to the game ready state (setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting error state, RAM error state, or backup error state). value), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hole computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the security timer is "1" or more. When it is determined that the value of the security timer is "1" or more, the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. FIG. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hole computer.

At step S4-20, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits). It is
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized), and the common 3 output request buffer is cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer is set to "0", and each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer is set to "0".
Next, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Then, when the obtained gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the game ready state, the normal display data setting process described later is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the setting change state, a display data setting process at the time of setting change, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, a display data setting process at the time of setting confirmation, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), an abnormality display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special figure 1 display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display pattern counter obtained is transferred to the common 0 output request buffer. set.
As a result, the first special symbol is displayed by the LED1 to LED8 among the light emitting elements forming the main display device 60. FIG.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 display pattern counter is acquired, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the value of the acquired special figure 2 display pattern counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, the second special symbol is displayed by the LEDs 9 to 16 among the light emitting elements forming the main display device 60 .
Next, the value of the general-purpose map display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value of the general-purpose map display symbol counter is set as the output data a.
Next, the values set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning of the RAM 230 are "state before opening the big winning opening at the time of the big win", "control state for opening the big winning opening at the time of the big win", and "closed valid big winning opening at the time of the big win". state", "Wait state for closing the big winning opening at the time of the big win", "State before opening the big winning opening at the time of the small win", "Control state for opening the big winning opening at the time of the small win", "Effective state of closing the big winning opening at the time of the small win" And it is determined whether or not it is a value that designates one of the special game phases of the "wait state for ending the big winning opening opening at the time of the small hit".
Then, the values set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning are "state before opening the big winning opening at the time of the big win", "control state of opening the big winning opening at the time of the big win", "effective state of closing the big winning opening at the time of the big win", "Large winning opening end wait state for big win", "Large winning opening opening state for small winning", "Large winning opening opening control state for small winning", "Large winning opening closed valid state for small winning" and "Small winning" When it is determined that it is a value that designates one of the special game phases in the waiting state for ending the opening of the big winning opening at the time of winning, the value set in the special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230 (corresponding to the type of the big winning symbol) value) is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data b.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value set in the winning special game phase flag area is a value designating the "special electric accessory non-operating state", the output data b is not set.
Next, the value set in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data c.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by ORing the output data a to output data c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the LEDs 17 and 18 display normal symbols, and the LEDs 19 to 23 display the number of round games executed during the big win game state or the small win game state ( The type of the big win game state or the type of the small win game state) is displayed, and the path (left side path or right side path) to launch the game ball is displayed by the LED 24 .
Next, the value of the special figure 1 pending number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data d.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data e.
Next, the value of the normal figure reservation number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data f.
Next, it is determined whether or not the power supply is restored.
Then, when it is determined that the power is restored, the value set in the special figure high probability state flag area is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data g.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is not restored, the output data g is not set.
Next, the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data h.
Next, display data (8 bits) obtained by ORing output data d to output data h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements that constitute the main display device 60, the LEDs 25 and 26 display the number of reserved special figures 1, the number of reserved special figures 2 is displayed by the LEDs 27 and 28, and the number of reserved special figures 2 is displayed by the LEDs 29 and 30. The number of pending is displayed, the LED31 displays the game state at the time of power return (during the occurrence of the special figure high probability state or the occurrence of the special figure low probability state), and the LED32 indicates the current game state (execution of time saving control in progress or stopped) is displayed.

In the setting change display data setting process, information indicating that the setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and the settings stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are set. Information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and "-" is set. is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the character "r", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the character "n.", and the LEDs 49 to 56 display the character ""-" is displayed, and the numbers indicating the set values are displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64.

In the setting confirmation display data setting process, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and the setting stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is set. Information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "r" (8 bits) is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data of "n." (8 bits) is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the RAM 230 is set. The display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the value area is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (clear value remains).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the character "r", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the character "n." A number indicating the value is displayed. Note that the LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In the abnormal display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer. At the same time, an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "E" (8 bits) is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data of "r." (8 bits) is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and Display data (error code) corresponding to the state (setting error state, RAM error state, or backup error state) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (clear value remains).
As a result, of the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the character "E", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the character "r." A number representing the code is displayed. Note that the LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

At step S4-21, a solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, control data (driving data) to be output to each solenoid 64 , 65 a , 65 b , 66 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of RAM 230 .
In step S4-22, port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer, solenoids 64, 65a, 65b, 66 and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signal, control signal, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output ports 205 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer. Further, each solenoid 64, 65a, 65b, 66 is driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-24. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S4-24, test signal output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is a process based on a program for executing a test-related process defined by gaming machine regulations. That is, the test signal output processing is processing based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220 . The test signal tube is invoked during execution of timer interrupt processing.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, execution status of time saving control, probability state of special symbol lottery, etc.) to the port output request buffer of RAM 230 Remember.
In step S4-25, performance display device control processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-26. The performance display device control processing will be described later.
In step S4-26, register return processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the original processing is returned to. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S4-1 is restored. After completion of the register return processing, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output processing in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing dynamic port output processing.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, as shown in FIG. 13, the process first proceeds to step S29-1.
In step S29-1, output data clear processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-2. In the output data clear process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, "0" is set as each bit value of the A register.
In step S29-2, main display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of the A register (value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 0. FIG. As a result, the output port 0 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 becomes low level.
In step S29-3, performance display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to the output port 4. FIG. As a result, the output port 4 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the performance display device 206 becomes low level.

In step S29-4, common selection processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether or not the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit (“3” in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit value, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the common counter.
In step S29-5, common output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-6. In common output processing, output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to output port 1 .
Specifically, in the common output process, when the value of the common counter is "0", the output data is output with "COM0" set to high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" set to low level. Output to port 1. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM1” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM2”, and “COM3” set to low level. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM2” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM1”, and “COM3” set to low level. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM3” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM1” and “COM2” set to low level. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".

In step S29-6, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-7, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S29-11.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the game ready status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.

In step S29-7, main display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, display data for the main display device 60 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, among the common 0 to common 3 output request buffers of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. set.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is the common The display data are set in the 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer.

In step S29-8, main display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to output port 0. FIG.
As a result, the data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver. 250a.
That is, the display on the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-10. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S29-10, performance display device output processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. Performance display device output processing will be described later.

In step S29-11, performance display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, among the common 0 to common 3 output request buffers of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. set.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the LED display setting process of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process (specifically, the display data setting process at the time of setting change, setting confirmation In the time display data setting process or the abnormal time display data setting process), it becomes the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer.

In step S29-12, performance display device data output processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-11 is output to the output port 4. FIG.
As a result, the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver. 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing performance display device output processing.
Performance display device output processing is processing based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 . That is, the performance display device output process is a process based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. FIG. Performance display device output processing is called during execution of dynamic port output processing.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, as shown in FIG. 14, the process first proceeds to step S30-1.
In step S30-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the register saving process, the values of all the registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to the saving area of the RAM. Also, the values of all stack pointers used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved in the save area of the RAM.

In step S30-2, performance display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, the display data set in the area corresponding to the value of the confirmed common counter is acquired from the identification segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer of the RAM 230, and the acquired display data is set in the A register. .
At this time, when the value of the common counter=“0”, the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the high-order 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired by the performance display device data acquisition process is set in the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control processing of step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt processing. displayed data.

In step S30-3, performance display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S30-2 is output to the output port 4. FIG.
As a result, data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, register restoration processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S30-1 (the value of the register used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the The value of the saved stack pointer (the value of the stack pointer used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.
In step S30-5, interrupt permission processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is released. As a result, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Setting-related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, as shown in FIG. 15, the process first proceeds to step S37-1.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether or not the setting change state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the setting change state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2, and the setting If it is determined that no change state has occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S37-8.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the setting change status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has occurred. Determine that no change state has occurred.

In step S37-2, set value acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the setting value acquisition process, the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are acquired (loaded), and the acquired setting values are stored in the register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4, and the RAM clear switch is pressed. 207 is not pressed (No), the process proceeds to step S37-5.
If the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed. If the RAM clear switch 207 is not turned on, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed. judge.
In step S37-4, set value update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the set value update process, "1" is added to the set value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the register is less than a predetermined set comparison value ("6" in this embodiment). is not less than the set comparison value (the set value is equal to or greater than the predetermined set comparison value) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-6, and the set value stored in the register is compared with the predetermined set comparison value. If it is determined to be less than the value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, set value initialization processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-7. In the setting value initialization process, the setting value stored in the register is overwritten with a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment).
In step S37-7, set value saving processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-8. In the setting value saving process, the setting values stored in the register are saved in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .

In step S37-8, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (is in the OFF state) (No), If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is ON (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). .
Here, if the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. It is determined that it is not.
In step S37-9, a subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-10. In the subcommand setting process, a setting-related end specifying command (subcommand) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S37-10, subcommand group setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-11. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 .
Here, the subcommand group includes a subcommand that specifies the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand that specifies the firing position, a subcommand that specifies the stop symbol of the first special symbol, and a stop symbol of the second special symbol. Subcommand to specify the pattern, subcommand to specify the special figure 1 reservation number, subcommand to specify the special figure 2 reservation number, subcommand to specify the value of the time saving counter, setting stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 It includes subcommands that specify values.
At step S37-11, the RAM set process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the next process (step S4-19) is performed. In the RAM set process, a playable state is set as the gaming machine state.
Specifically, a value corresponding to the playable state is stored (saved) as a value (gaming machine state flag) in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 .

(switch management processing)
Next, the switch management processing of step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing switch management processing.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, as shown in FIG. 16, the process first proceeds to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the gate switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the gate switch 104 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2, and the gate If it is determined that the ON state of the switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, normal chart starting ball detection processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. Normal figure starting ball detection processing will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting opening switch 101 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting opening switch 101 is detected (Yes), step When the process proceeds to S5-4 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, a special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special figure 1 starting ball detection processing will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether the ON state of the first special figure 2 starting port switch 102a is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the first special figure 2 starting port switch 102a is detected (Yes) In, when it is determined that the ON state of the first special figure 2 starting port switch 102a is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-7.
In step S5-6, a special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-7. The special figure 2 starting ball detection processing will be described later.
In step S5-7, it is determined whether or not the on state of the second special figure 2 starting port switch 102b is detected, and if it is determined that the on state of the second special figure 2 starting port switch 102b is detected (Yes) In, when it is determined that the ON state of the second special figure 2 starting port switch 102b is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-9.
In step S5-8, a special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-9. The special figure 2 starting ball detection processing will be described later.

In step S5-9, it is determined whether or not the ON state of V-region switch 110 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of V-region switch 110 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-10. If it is determined that the ON state of the V-region switch 110 has not been detected (No), the series of processing ends and the next processing (step S4-13) is performed.
In step S5-10, V passage detection processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-13) is performed.
In the V passage detection process, first, it is determined whether or not it is during the V valid period.
Here, the "V valid period" is the first round game from the start of the first round game executed during the occurrence of any one of the "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 4". It is a period until the effective time (interval time) for closing the big winning mouth after the end of.
Then, when it is determined that it is during the V valid period, "1" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, and the V winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the V valid period, the process ends.

(normal figure starting ball detection processing)
Next, normal figure starting ball detection processing in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing normal/normal starting ball detection processing.
When the normal chart starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 17, the process first proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, normal figure random number acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the general pattern random number acquisition process, the winning random number (random value) is acquired (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern reservation number counter is the upper limit value ("1" in this embodiment), and if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern reservation number counter is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3, and if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern pending number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5- 3).
In step S6-3, normal figure pending number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the general pattern reservation number counter update process, the value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the general pattern reservation number counter is newly set to the general pattern reservation number counter.

In step S6-4, the general pattern random number storage process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the general pattern random number storage process, the hit random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the general pattern game information storage area of the RAM 230 as the general pattern game information.
The RAM 230 includes a general game information storage area in which general game information is stored.
The general pattern game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 0 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing general pattern game information.
In the storage area 0, the general pattern game information during execution of the game is stored. On the other hand, in the storage area 1 to storage area 4, general-purpose game information in which the general-purpose hit-lose determination is suspended is stored. The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower) in descending order of priority. Then, the normal game information stored in the storage area 1 to the memory area 4, the normal game hit-loss determination is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area with the higher priority.

(Special figure 1 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, as shown in FIG. 18, the process first proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 . In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry count counter.
In step S7-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the pending number counter address setting process, in the pending number counter address setting area of the RAM 230, the address of the special figure 1 pending number counter is set.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special figure 2 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection processing of steps S5-6 and S5-8 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the special figure 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in steps S5-6 and S5-8, as shown in FIG. 19, the process first proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 . In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry count counter.
Also, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not it is during the period of hitting to the right. Then, when it is determined that the ball is not in the right-handed period (it is in the left-handed period), "1" is added to the value of the right-handed error counter.
In step S8-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the pending number counter address setting process, in the pending number counter address area of the RAM 230, the address of the special figure 2 pending number counter is set.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the next process (steps S5-7, S5-9) is performed. The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special symbol random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process of steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 20, the process first proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special figure pending number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special figure reservation number acquisition process, the value of the special figure reservation number counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter or special figure 2 reservation number counter) specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area (special figure 1 reservation Get (load) the number or special figure 2 pending number).

In step S9-3, a special random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random numbers) such as jackpot random numbers, winning pattern random numbers, reach mode random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers are acquired (loaded) from loop counters corresponding to each lottery. At this time, a corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, the number of reserved special figures acquired in step S9-2 (the number of reserved special figures 1 or the number of reserved special figures 2) is the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). However, if it is determined that the number of special figures pending is not the upper limit (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5, and if it is determined that the number of special figures pending is the upper limit (Yes), a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5).
In step S9-5, a special figure pending number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special figure pending number counter update process, the value set in the special figure pending number counter (special figure 1 pending number counter or special figure 2 pending number counter) specified by the address set in the pending number counter address area The value obtained by adding "1" to is newly set to the special figure pending number counter.

In step S9-6, a special random number saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure random number storage process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game Information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area).
The RAM 230 includes a special figure 1 game information storage area in which special figure 1 game information is stored and a special figure 2 game information storage area in which special figure 2 game information is stored.
The special figure 1 game information storage area includes storage area 0 to storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing special figure 1 game information.
In the storage area 0, the special figure 1 game information during execution of the game is stored. On the other hand, the storage area 1 ~ storage area 4, the special figure 1 game information is stored start determination is pending. The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower) in descending order of priority. Then, the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 1 to the storage area 4, starting determination is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area with the higher priority.
The special figure 2 game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 0 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the special figure 2 game information.
In the storage area 0, the special figure 2 game information during execution of the game is stored. On the other hand, the storage area 1 ~ storage area 4, the special figure 2 game information is stored start determination is pending. The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower) in descending order of priority. Then, the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 1 to the storage area 4, starting determination is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area with the higher priority.

In the special figure random number storage process, if the special symbol identification value obtained in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are used as special figure 1 game information. , is stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in an empty memory area (among the empty memory areas, the memory area with the highest priority) among the memory areas 1 to 4. .
That is, when the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "1", various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1. On the other hand, when the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "2", various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 2. If the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "3", various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3. If the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 4.
On the other hand, if the special symbol identification value obtained in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 as special figure 2 game information, special figure 2 game Store in the information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in an empty memory area (among the empty memory areas, the memory area with the highest priority) among the memory areas 1 to 4. .
That is, when the value of the current special figure 2 pending number counter = "1", various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1. On the other hand, when the value of the current special figure 2 pending number counter = "2", various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 2. If the value of the current special figure 2 pending number counter = "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3. If the value of the current special figure 2 pending number counter = "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 4.

In step S9-7, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the pending number designation command setting process, a pending number designation command specifying that the special figure pending number (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number) has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 do. At this time, if the special symbol identification value obtained in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the reserved number designation command specifying that the special figure 1 reserved number has increased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230, and if the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, a reservation number designation command that specifies that the special figure 2 reservation number has increased by "1", RAM 230 subcommand output request buffer.

In step S9-8, a preliminary determination process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5). In the prior determination process, the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure) saved (stored) in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) in step S9-6 2 game information) (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determined game information"), various lottery results are pre-determined.
In this embodiment, for all game information (special figure 1 game information and special figure 2 game information), prior determination of various lottery results is performed.
In addition, regarding the game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, the prior determination of various lottery results may not be performed. In addition, for the special figure 2 game information acquired (stored) during the stop of the time saving control, the pre-determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the special figure 1 game information acquired (stored) during the execution of the time saving control , may be configured such that the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed.

In the prior determination process, first, the prior special figure per determination process is executed.
In the preliminary special figure hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery ("big hit", "small hit" or "loss") is determined (preliminary special figure hit determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol big winning lottery table in which the big winning values of the special symbol lottery are registered and a special symbol small winning lottery table in which the small winning values of the special symbol lottery are registered.
In addition, as a special figure jackpot lottery table, a set value ("1" to "6") and a game state ("special figure low probability state" or "special figure high probability state") corresponding to each combination A special figure jackpot lottery table is stored.
In addition, as a special figure small winning lottery table, a special figure small winning lottery table corresponding to the special figure 1 game information (first special symbol lottery) and a special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 game information (second special symbol lottery) A small winning lottery table and are stored.
In advance special figure hit determination processing, first, advance special figure big hit determination processing is executed.
In the advance special figure jackpot determination process, the value (set value) set in the set value area and the current game state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state") are confirmed. , Read out the special figure big hit lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result. Then, based on the big win random number included in the game information to be pre-determined and the read-out special big win lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "big win" is won (preliminary special big win determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to preliminary determination matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has been won (special pattern lottery). The result is judged as a “jackpot”). On the other hand, when the jackpot random number included in the game information to be pre-determined does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has not been won.
When it is determined that the "big hit" is not won by the preliminary special figure big hit determination process, next, the preliminary special figure small hit determination process is executed.
In the preliminary special figure small hit determination process, the reservation type of the preliminary determination target game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is confirmed, and the special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the big hit random number included in the game information to be pre-determined and the read special figure small winning lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "small hit" is won (preliminary special figure small winning determination). .
At this time, if the big hit random number included in the pre-determination target game information matches the small hit value registered in the special small hit lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has been won (special The result of the pattern lottery is determined as a "small hit"). On the other hand, when the big hit random number included in the game information to be pre-determined does not match the small hit value registered in the special small prize lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has not been won.
When it is determined that the "small hit" is not won by the advance special symbol small hit determination processing, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "loss".

In advance determination processing, next, advance special symbol design determination processing is executed. In the prior special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (preliminary special symbol determination).
When it is determined to be a "big hit" (winning) by the pre-special figure hit determination, in the pre-special figure symbol determination process, the type of the "big hit symbol" is determined (preliminary special figure symbol determination).
The ROM 220 stores a jackpot symbol lottery table in which correspondence between a jackpot symbol random number and a type of "big hit symbol" is registered. Also, as the jackpot symbol lottery tables, a first jackpot pattern lottery table corresponding to the special figure 1 game information and a second jackpot pattern lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 game information are stored.
In the first big-hit symbol lottery table, "big-hit symbol 1" and "big-hit symbol 2" are registered as types of the "big-hit symbol". On the other hand, in the second big-hit symbol lottery table, "big-hit symbol 3" and "big-hit symbol 4" are registered as types of the "big-hit symbol".
Then, when the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 1 game information, the first big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read first big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
On the other hand, when the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 2 game information, the second big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read second big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
When it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by the preliminary special figure hit determination, in the preliminary special figure design determination process, the type of "small hit design" is determined (preliminary special figure design determination).
The ROM 220 stores a small winning symbol lottery table in which correspondences between winning symbol random numbers and types of "small winning symbols" are registered. In addition, as the small winning symbol lottery table, the first small winning symbol lottery table corresponding to the special figure 1 game information and the second small winning symbol lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 game information are stored.
Then, when the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 1 game information, the first small hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read first small winning symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 2 game information, the second small hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read second small winning symbol lottery table.
In addition, in this embodiment, only "small hit design 1" is defined as the type of the small hit design. Therefore, when it is determined as a "small hit" (winning) by the preliminary special figure hit determination, "small hit design 1" is determined as the type of the small hit design.
When it is determined to be "lost" (defeated) by the pre-special figure hit determination, in the pre-special figure symbol determination process, "missing symbol" is determined (preliminary special figure symbol determination) as the type of the stop symbol.

In the advance determination process, next, a first prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the first prefetching designation command setting process, the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 stores the first prefetching designation command that designates the type of the stop symbol determined by the advance special symbol symbol determination.

In advance determination processing, next, advance special figure variation mode determination processing is executed.
In the advance special figure variation mode determination process, a variation mode number (variation mode type) and a variation pattern number (variation pattern type) are determined.
In the pre-special figure variation mode determination process, if it is determined as a "big hit" by the pre-special figure per determination, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern number ( The type of variation pattern) is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be "missing" by the pre-special figure hit determination, the variation mode number (variation mode type), the variation pattern number (variation pattern type), and the is determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be a "small hit" by the pre-special hit determination, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and a variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) are determined. At this time, based on the game state ("game state A" to "game state D") and the pending type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the winning time prior variation pattern determination process, and , prior variation pattern determination processing at the time of failure, either processing is selected.
Specifically, the result of the pre-special figure hit determination = "small hit", and the current game state = "game state A", and the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information = special figure 1 game information , the prior variation pattern determination process at the time of failure is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the pre-special figure hit determination = "small hit", and the current game state = "game state A", and the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information = special figure 2 game information In this case, the prior variation pattern determination process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the pre-special figure hit determination = "small hit", and the current game state = "game state B", and the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information = special figure 1 game information In this case, the prior variation pattern determination process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the pre-special figure hit determination = "small hit", and the current game state = "game state B", and the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information = special figure 2 game information In this case, the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of failure is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the pre-special figure hit determination = "small hit", and the current game state = "game state C", and the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information = special figure 1 game information In this case, the prior variation pattern determination process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the pre-special figure hit determination = "small hit", and the current game state = "game state C", and the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information = special figure 2 game information In this case, the prior variation pattern determination process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the pre-special figure hit determination = "small hit", and the current game state = "game state D", and the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information = special figure 1 game information In this case, the prior variation pattern determination process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the pre-special figure hit determination = "small hit", and the current game state = "game state D", and the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information = special figure 2 game information In this case, the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of failure is selected.

In the prior variation pattern determination process at winning, first, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is determined (prior variation mode determination at winning).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation mode determination table in which correspondence between reach mode random numbers and variation mode numbers (variation mode types) is registered.
In addition, as a winning fluctuation mode determination table, the reservation type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the game state ("game state A" to "game state D"), and the type of stop pattern (" A variation mode determination table at the time of winning corresponding to each combination of "big win pattern 1" to "big win pattern 4" or "small win pattern 1") is stored.
In each winning variation mode determination table, each reach mode random number corresponds to a variation mode number (variation mode type) and a winning variation pattern determination table (information specifying the winning variation pattern determination table). attached. As a result, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the winning variation pattern determination table are simultaneously selected based on each winning variation mode determination table.
In the winning prior variation mode determination, first, the reservation type of the pre-judgment target game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), and the current game state ("game state A" ~ "game state D") And, the type of the stop symbol determined by the prior special symbol symbol determination is confirmed, and the winning fluctuation mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the winning variation pattern determination table are determined based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read winning variation mode determination table. do.
In the prior variation pattern determination process at winning, next, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined (prior variation pattern determination at winning).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation pattern determination table in which correspondences between variation pattern random numbers and variation pattern numbers (variation pattern types) are registered.
Also, a plurality of winning variation pattern determination tables having different contents are stored as the winning variation pattern determination table.
In the winning-time prior variation pattern determination, first, the winning-time variation pattern determination table determined by the winning-time prior variation mode determination is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read winning variation pattern determination table.

In the prior variation pattern determination process at the time of failure, first, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is determined (prior variation mode determination at the time of failure).
The ROM 220 stores a failure change mode determination table in which correspondence between reach mode random numbers and change mode numbers (variation mode types) is registered.
In addition, as a change mode determination table at the time of defeat, the reservation type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of reservations (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number), and the game state ("game state A” to “game state D”) and the type of stop symbol (“lost symbol”), and corresponding combinations of each combination are stored.
In each reach fluctuation mode determination table, each reach mode random number corresponds to a fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and a fluctuation pattern judgment table at loss (information specifying the fluctuation pattern judgment table at loss). attached. As a result, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the failure variation pattern determination table are simultaneously selected based on each failure variation mode determination table.
In the prior fluctuation mode determination at the time of defeat, first, the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) and the number of reservations corresponding to the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information (special figure 1 Reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number), the current game state ("game state A" to "game state D"), and the type of stop symbol determined by pre-special symbol determination, A failure change mode determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read fluctuation mode determination table at the time of defeat, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern determination table at the time of defeat are determined. do.
In the prior variation pattern determination process at the time of failure, next, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined (prior variation pattern determination at the time of failure).
The ROM 220 stores a failure variation pattern determination table in which correspondences between variation pattern random numbers and variation pattern numbers (variation pattern types) are registered.
Further, a plurality of failure variation pattern determination tables having mutually different contents are stored as the failure variation pattern determination table.
In the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination at the time of failure, first, the fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of failure determined by the preliminary variation mode determination at the time of failure is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read-out failure variation pattern determination table.

In the advance determination process, next, second and third look-ahead designation command setting processes are executed.
In the second and third look-ahead specification command setting processing, the second look-ahead specification command that specifies the variation mode number determined by the prior variation mode determination, and the third look-ahead that specifies the variation pattern number determined by the prior variation pattern determination The designated command and are stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

(Special game management processing)
Next, the special game management process of step S4-13 will be explained.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing special game management processing.
In this embodiment, as a situation (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 special game phase") related to the game based on the special figure 1 display device (first special symbol), "special figure 1 fluctuation waiting state" and "special figure 1 fluctuating state” and “special figure 1 stop symbol display state” are defined.
In addition, as a situation related to the game based on the special figure 2 display device (second special symbol) (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 special game phase"), "special figure 2 fluctuation waiting state" and "special figure 2 fluctuation state” and “special figure 2 stop symbol display state” are defined.
Furthermore, as a phase (hereinafter referred to as "special game phase at the time of winning") related to the game (big win game state or small win game state) based on the special electric accessories 54a and 55a, "big win at big winning opening before opening state". , ``large winning opening opening control state at the time of big win'', ``large winning opening closed valid state at the time of big winning'', ``waiting state for ending the opening of the big winning opening at the time of big winning'', and ``state before opening the big winning opening at the time of small winning''. , ``Limited hit large winning opening open control state'', ``Limited winning large winning opening closing effective state'', ``Large winning opening opening end wait state when small winning'', and ``Special electric accessory non-operating state'' and are stipulated.

Also, the RAM 230 is provided with a special figure 1 special game phase flag area, a special figure 2 special game phase flag area, and a winning special game phase flag area.
In the special figure 1 special game phase flag area, one of the "special figure 1 fluctuation waiting state", "special figure 1 changing state" and "special figure 1 stop symbol display state" A corresponding value (special figure 1 special game phase flag) is set (stored). Thereby, it is possible to specify (determine) the special figure 1 special game phase based on the value set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area.
In the special figure 2 special game phase flag area, one special figure 2 special game phase out of "special figure 2 fluctuation waiting state", "special figure 2 changing state" and "special figure 2 stop symbol display state" A corresponding value (special figure 2 special game phase flag) is set (stored). Thereby, it is possible to specify (determine) the special figure 2 special game phase based on the value set in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area.
In the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, ``state before opening the big winning opening at the time of the big win'', ``control state of opening the big winning opening at the time of the big winning'', ``effective state of closing the big winning opening at the time of the big winning'', and ``open the big winning opening at the time of the big winning. End wait state", "Large winning opening before opening state at small hit", "Large winning opening opening control state at small winning", "Large winning opening closing valid state at small winning", "Large winning opening open at small winning end" A value (special game phase flag at winning) corresponding to one special game phase at winning out of "wait state" and "non-operating state of special electric accessory" is set (stored). Thereby, it is possible to specify (determine) the special game phase at the time of winning based on the value set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning.

Furthermore, in the ROM 220, as a special game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the special game, a special game control module corresponding to each special figure 1 special game phase, and a special game control module corresponding to each special figure 2 special game phase and a special game control module corresponding to each winning special game phase (except for the "special electric accessory non-operating state") are stored.
And, in the special game management process, corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 (special figure 1 special game phase flag area, special figure 2 special game phase flag area, winning special game phase flag area) A special game control module is selected, and processing based on the selected special game control module is executed.
Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, as shown in FIG. 21, the process first proceeds to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, a special figure 2 special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. Special figure 2 special game management processing will be described later.
In step S10-2, a special figure 1 special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. The special figure 1 special game management process will be described later.
In step S10-3, a winning special game management process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). The winning special game management process will be described later.

(Special figure 2 special game management processing)
Next, the special figure 2 special game management process executed in step S10-1 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 special game management process.
When the special figure 2 special game management process is executed in step S10-1, as shown in FIG. 22, the process first proceeds to step S40-1.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether or not the special electric role product is in the non-operating state, and if it is determined that the special electric role product is in the non-operating state (Yes), the process proceeds to step S40-2 , If it is determined that it is not in the special electric accessory non-operating state (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-2).
Here, if the value set in the winning special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the "special electric role product non-operating state", it is determined that the special electric role product is in the non-operating state. , If it is not a value corresponding to "special electric role product non-operating state", it is determined that it is not in the special electric role product non-operating state.

In step S40-2, a process target pattern setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-3. In the process target symbol setting process, in the process target symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230, a value ("1" in this embodiment) corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is set.
As a result, the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is set as the type of special symbol to be processed (hereinafter referred to as "processed symbol"), and the type of special symbol to be non-processed (hereinafter , "Non-process target symbol"), the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is set.
In step S40-3, special game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-4. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special figure 2 special game phase) set in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S40-4, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-5. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (second special game phase) acquired in step S40-3 is read.

In step S40-5, a special game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-2). In the special game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read in step S40-4 is started.
Specifically, in the special game control module execution process, if the value obtained in step S40-3 is a value corresponding to the "special figure 2 variation waiting state", the later-described special figure variation waiting process is started, " If it is a value corresponding to "special figure 2 varying state", processing during special figure variation to be described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to "special figure 2 stop design display state", processing during special figure stop described later is started.
At this time, the process based on each special game module is executed with the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) as the symbol to be processed and the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) as the non-processed symbol.

(Special figure 1 special game management processing)
Next, the special figure 1 special game management process executed in step S10-2 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the special figure 1 special game management process.
When the special figure 1 special game management process is executed in step S10-2, as shown in FIG. 23, the process first proceeds to step S41-1.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether or not the special electric role product is in the non-operating state, and if it is determined that the special electric role product is in the non-operating state (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-2 , If it is determined that it is not in the special electric accessory non-operating state (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-3).
Here, if the value set in the winning special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the "special electric role product non-operating state", it is determined that the special electric role product is in the non-operating state. , If it is not a value corresponding to "special electric role product non-operating state", it is determined that it is not in the special electric role product non-operating state.

In step S41-2, a process target pattern setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-3. In the process target symbol setting process, in the process target symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230, a value ("0" in this embodiment) corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is set.
As a result, the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is set as the symbol to be processed, and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is set as the non-processed symbol.
In step S41-3, special game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-4. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special figure 1 special game phase) set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S41-4, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-5. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (first special game phase) acquired in step S41-3 is read.

In step S41-5, a special game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-3). In the special game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read in step S41-3 is started.
Specifically, in the special game control module execution process, if the value obtained in step S41-3 is a value corresponding to the "special figure 1 variation waiting state", the later-described special figure variation waiting process is started, " If it is a value corresponding to special figure 1 fluctuating state", the special figure fluctuation process described later is started, and if the value corresponds to "special figure 1 stop symbol display state", special figure stop process described later is started.
At this time, the process based on each special game module is executed with the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) as the symbol to be processed and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) as the non-processed symbol.

(Special game management process at the time of winning)
Next, the winning special game management process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the winning special game management process.
When the winning special game management process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 24, the process first proceeds to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, special game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning of the RAM 230 (special game phase at the time of winning) is acquired (loaded).
In step S42-2, it is determined whether the value obtained in step S42-1 (special game phase when winning) is a value corresponding to the "special electric role product non-operating state". If it is determined that it is not a value corresponding to "non-operating state" (No), the process proceeds to step S42-3, and if it is determined that it is a value corresponding to "special electric accessory non-operating state" (Yes) ends the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S42-3, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-4. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value acquired in step S42-1 (special game phase when winning) is read.

In step S42-4, a special game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read in step S42-3 is started.
Specifically, in the special game control module execution process, when the value obtained in step S42-3 is a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening at the time of the big hit", the processing before opening the big winning opening, which will be described later, starts. If the value corresponds to the "large winning opening opening control state at the time of the big win", the pre-processing for opening the big winning opening to be described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "effective state of closing the big winning opening at the time of the big winning", When the value corresponding to the "big winning opening end wait state at the time of the big winning opening" is started, the later-described big winning opening closing wait process is started, and the "big winning at the time of the small winning" is started. If the value corresponds to the "state before opening the mouth", the pre-opening process for the big winning opening at the time of the small win described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "control state for opening the big winning mouth at the time of the small win", the small When the big winning opening opening pre-processing is started, and if the value corresponds to the "small winning big winning opening closing valid state", the small winning big winning opening closing valid process described later is started, and the "small winning big winning opening closing valid process" If the value corresponds to the "big winning opening open end wait state", the big winning opening opening end wait process at the time of a small hit, which will be described later, is started.

(Special figure fluctuation waiting process)
Next, the special figure variation waiting process executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a special figure variation waiting process.
When the special figure variation waiting process is executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5, as shown in FIG. 25, the process first proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether the value of the pending number counter (special figure 1 pending number counter or special figure 2 pending counter) corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "1" or more, and the pattern to be processed is If it is determined that the value of the corresponding pending number counter is "1" or more (Yes), the process proceeds to step S11-2, and the value of the pending number counter corresponding to the pattern to be processed is not "1" or more ( is "0") (No), the process proceeds to step S11-18.
Here, when the value set in the processing object design discrimination flag area is "1", the special figure 2 reservation number counter becomes the reservation number counter corresponding to the processing object design.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing object design discrimination flag area is "0", the special figure 1 reservation number counter becomes the reservation number counter corresponding to the processing object design.

In step S11-2, it is determined whether or not the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the non-processed pattern designates a "jackpot pattern"("jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 4"). If it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the non-processed pattern designates the "jackpot pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S11-3, When it is determined that the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed does not specify the "big hit symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S11-4.
Here, the RAM 230 is provided with a special figure 1 symbol information storage area and a special figure 2 symbol information storage area.
In the "special figure 1 symbol information storage area", the symbol information corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is set (stored).
In the "special figure 2 symbol information storage area", the symbol information corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is set (stored).
The "symbol information" is information specifying the type of the stop symbol determined by the special symbol determination (step S11-7).
Then, in step S11-2, when the value set in the process target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the "big hit pattern" is specified for the pattern information stored in the special figure 1 pattern information storage area. It is determined whether or not
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing object pattern discrimination flag area is "0", whether or not the "big hit pattern" is specified for the pattern information stored in the special figure 2 pattern information storage area is determined. be judged.

In step S11-3, it is determined whether or not the non-processed pattern is being displayed stopped (during the stop time). 4, and when it is determined that the non-processed pattern is being stopped and displayed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3).
Here, if the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", based on the value set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area, during the stop display of the non-process target symbol It is determined whether there is At this time, if the value set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area is a value corresponding to the "special figure 1 stop symbol display state", it is determined that the non-process target symbol is being displayed stopped, If the value does not correspond to the "special figure 1 stop design display state", it is determined that the non-processed design is not being displayed in a stopped state.
On the other hand, when the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", based on the value set in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area, the non-process target symbol is being stopped and displayed. It is determined whether or not At this time, if the value set in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area is a value corresponding to the "special figure 2 stop symbol display state", it is determined that the non-process target symbol is being displayed stopped, If it is not a value corresponding to the "special figure 2 stop design display state", it is determined that the non-processed design is not being displayed stop.

In step S11-4, a special figure pending number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the special figure reservation number update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the reservation number counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter or special figure 2 reservation number counter) corresponding to the pattern to be processed.
Here, when the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter.
On the other hand, when the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 reserved number counter.
In step S11-5, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the pending number designation command setting process, the pending number designation command that specifies that the number of reservations corresponding to the pattern to be processed (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) has decreased by "1" is output as a subcommand of the RAM 230 Store in the request buffer.
Here, if the value set in the process target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a pending number designation command specifying that the special figure 2 pending number has decreased by "1", a subcommand output request of the RAM 230 Store in buffer.
On the other hand, if the value set in the process target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the reserved number designation command specifying that the special figure 1 reserved number has decreased by "1" is sent to the sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230 memorize to

In step S11-6, a special pattern storage area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the special symbol storage area shift process, in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) corresponding to the symbol to be processed, game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is stored.
Here, when the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the storage area in which the special figure 2 game information is stored is shifted in the special figure 2 game information storage area. That is, first, the memory contents of memory area 1 are shifted (moved) to memory area 0 . Next, the memory contents of the memory area 2 are shifted to the memory area 1. FIG. Next, the memory contents of memory area 3 are shifted to memory area 2 . Next, the contents stored in storage area 4 are shifted to storage area 3 . Next, the contents stored in the storage area 4 are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, when the value set in the target symbol determination flag area is "0", the storage area in which the special figure 1 game information is stored is shifted in the special figure 1 game information storage area. That is, first, the memory contents of memory area 1 are shifted (moved) to memory area 0 . Next, the memory contents of the memory area 2 are shifted to the memory area 1. FIG. Next, the memory contents of memory area 3 are shifted to memory area 2 . Next, the contents stored in storage area 4 are shifted to storage area 3 . Next, the contents stored in the storage area 4 are cleared (initialized).

In step S11-7, setting abnormality determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the setting error determination process, occurrence of setting error is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is obtained. Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired setting value is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (“6” in this embodiment).
When it is determined that the obtained setting value is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (is equal to or greater than the predetermined setting comparison value), the value of the gaming machine state flag area (gaming machine state flag) of the RAM 230 is set to the setting abnormal state. Store (save) the corresponding value. Also, a subcommand specifying the occurrence of a setting error is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired setting value is less than the predetermined setting comparison value, the next process (step S11-8) is performed.

In step S11-8, a special figure hit determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the special figure hit determination process, the game information stored in the storage area 0 of the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) corresponding to the symbol to be processed The result of the special symbol lottery is determined (determined as a special symbol) based on the game information to be determined).
Here, if the value set in the process target symbol determination flag area is "1", the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 0 of the special figure 2 game information storage area is the start determination target game become information.
On the other hand, if the value set in the process target symbol determination flag area is "0", the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 0 of the special figure 1 game information storage area is the start determination target game information becomes.

Specifically, in the special figure per determination process, first, acquire the pattern information set in the symbol information storage area (special figure 1 symbol information storage area or special figure 2 symbol information storage area) corresponding to the non-processed symbol do.
Under the present circumstances, when the value set to the process target design discrimination|determination flag area|region is "1", the design information set to the special-figure 1 design information storage area is acquired. On the other hand, when the value set in the process object design discrimination flag area is "0", the design information set in the special figure 2 design information storage area is acquired.
Next, it is determined whether or not the symbol information corresponding to the acquired non-process target symbol designates a "big win symbol"("big win symbol 1" to "big win symbol 4").
Then, when it is determined that the pattern information corresponding to the acquired non-process target pattern designates the "big hit pattern", without executing the special figure big hit determination process and the special figure small hit determination process for the process target pattern , the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "lost", and the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-9).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pattern information corresponding to the acquired non-processed pattern does not specify the "big hit pattern" (specifies the "small hit pattern 1" or "lost pattern"), for the pattern to be processed , First, a special figure big hit determination process is executed.
In the special figure big hit determination process, the value (set value) set in the setting value area and the current game state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state") are confirmed, A special figure big hit lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Based on the jackpot random number included in the start determination target game information and the read-out special jackpot lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "jackpot" is won (special jackpot determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the start determination target game information matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has been won. The result is judged as a “jackpot”). On the other hand, when the jackpot random number included in the game information for start determination does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has not been won.
When it is determined that the "big hit" is not won by the special figure big hit determination process, next, the special figure small hit determination process is executed for the symbol to be processed.
In the special figure small hit determination process, the reservation type of the start determination target game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is confirmed, and the special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the big hit random number included in the start determination target game information and the read special figure small hit lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "small hit" is won (special figure small win determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the start determination target game information matches the jackpot value registered in the special small hit lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has been won (special The result of the pattern lottery is determined as a "small hit"). On the other hand, when the big hit random number included in the game information to be determined for starting does not match the small hit value registered in the special small prize lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has not been won.
When it is determined that the "small hit" is not won by the special symbol small hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "lost" for the symbol to be processed.

In step S11-9, a special symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the special figure design determination process, the type of the stop design of the process target symbol is determined (special figure design determination).
Concretely, in special figure design decision processing, first, the result of decision per special figure is verified.
Then, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the type of "big hit design" is determined.
For this, when the value set in the process target symbol determination flag area is "1", the second big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read second big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
On the other hand, when the value set in the process target symbol determination flag area is "0", the first big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read first big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the type of "small hit design" is determined.
For this, when the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the second small winning symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read second small winning symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the first small winning symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read first small winning symbol lottery table.
In addition, in this embodiment, only "small hit design 1" is defined as the type of the small hit design. Therefore, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, "small hit design 1" is determined as the type of the small hit design.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the special figure hit determination, "missing design" is determined as the type of the stop design.
In the special figure design determination process, next, the symbol information specifying the type of the determined stopped design is stored in the symbol information storage area (special figure 1 symbol information storage area or special figure 2 symbol information storage area) corresponding to the symbol to be processed. set to
At this time, if the value set in the target symbol determination flag area is "1", the symbol information designating the type of the determined stop symbol is set in the special figure 2 symbol information storage area.
On the other hand, when the value set in the target symbol determination flag area is "0", the symbol information designating the type of the determined stop symbol is set in the special figure 1 symbol information storage area.
In step S11-10, a pattern type specification command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the symbol type designation command setting process, the symbol type designation command designating the type of the stop symbol determined in step S11-9 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-11, a special figure stop pattern number determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the special figure stop design number determination process, the stop design number of the processing object design is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop symbol number lottery table in which correspondences between winning symbol random numbers and stop symbol numbers (segment data) are registered.
In addition, as stop pattern number lottery tables, a stop pattern number lottery table for big wins corresponding to "big hits", a stop pattern number lottery table for small wins corresponding to "minor wins", and a stop pattern number lottery table for losers corresponding to "losses". A pattern number lottery table is stored.
In addition, as a jackpot stop pattern number lottery table, a jackpot stop pattern number lottery table corresponding to the first special pattern (special figure 1 game information) and a jackpot time corresponding to the second special pattern (special figure 2 game information) A stop symbol number lottery table is stored.
Furthermore, as the stop design number lottery table corresponding to the "small hit", the stop design number lottery table for the small hit corresponding to the first special design (special design 1 game information) and the second special design (special design 2 game information) ) is stored with a small hit stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to .

In the special figure stop pattern number determination process, first, the result of the special figure hit determination is confirmed.
Then, when it is determined as a "jackpot" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is confirmed, and the jackpot stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is generated. read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read-out big-hit stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined as a "small hit" (winning) by special hit determination, the value set in the processing object pattern discrimination flag area is checked, and the small hit stop pattern number lottery corresponding to the confirmation result read the table. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read small winning stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the special figure per determination, the stop design number lottery table is read when losing. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read stop symbol number lottery table upon losing.
Here, the RAM 230 has a stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and a stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information). is provided.
Then, in the stop symbol number determination process, next, the determined stop symbol number is stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed.
At this time, if the value set in the target symbol determination flag area is "1", the determined stop symbol number is stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information). Remember.
On the other hand, when the value set in the target symbol determination flag area is "0", the determined stop symbol number is stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information). do.

In step S11-12, a special figure variation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-13. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (variation mode type and variation pattern type) of the symbol to be processed is determined.
In the special figure variation pattern determination process, if it is determined to be a "big hit" by the special figure per determination, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and variation pattern number (variation pattern number) are determined by the winning variation pattern determination process described later. type) and are determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be "missing" by the special figure per determination, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) are determined by the variation pattern determination process at the time of defeat, which will be described later. be done.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be a "small hit" by the special figure per determination, the variation pattern determination process at the time of winning, and the variation pattern determination process at the time of failure, by any process, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) are determined. At this time, based on the game state ("game state A" to "game state D") and the pending type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), variation pattern determination processing at the time of winning, and One process is selected from among the fluctuation pattern determination processes at the time of losing.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7(a), the result of the special figure hit determination = "small hit", and the current game state = "game state A", and the processing target symbol discrimination flag When the value set in the area=“0”, the change pattern determination process at loss is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the special figure hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state A", and the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area = "1" In such a case, the variation pattern determination process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the special figure hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state B", and the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area = "0" In such a case, the variation pattern determination process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the special figure hit determination = "small hit", and the current game state = "game state B", and the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area = "1" If there is, the change pattern determination process at the time of failure is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the special figure hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state C", and the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area = "0" In such a case, the variation pattern determination process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the special figure hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state C", and the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area = "1" In such a case, the variation pattern determination process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the special figure hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state D", and the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area = "0" In such a case, the variation pattern determination process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the special figure hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state D", and the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area = "1" If there is, the change pattern determination process at the time of failure is selected.

In the winning variation pattern determination process, first, the variation mode number (variation mode type) is determined (winning variation mode determination).
In the winning fluctuation mode determination, first, the value set in the process target symbol determination flag area, the current game state ("game state A" to "game state D"), and the special symbol determination The type of the stop symbol is confirmed, and the winning variation mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the start determination target game information and the read winning variation mode determination table, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the winning variation pattern determination table are determined. do.
In the winning variation pattern determination process, next, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined (winning variation pattern determination).
In the winning variation pattern determination, first, the winning variation pattern determination table determined by the winning variation mode determination is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the start determination target game information and the read winning variation pattern determination table.

In the failure variation pattern determination process, first, the variation mode number (variation mode type) is determined (failure variation mode determination).
At the time of losing the variation mode determination, first, the value set in the process target pattern discrimination flag area, the value of the pending number counter (special figure 1 pending number counter or special figure 2 pending number counter) corresponding to the process target pattern , Check the current game state ("game state A" to "game state D") and the type of the stop symbol determined by the special symbol determination, and determine the variation mode at the time of defeat corresponding to the confirmation result. read the table.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the start determination target game information and the read fluctuation mode determination table at the time of defeat, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern determination table at the time of failure are determined. do.
In the fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of failure, next, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined (variation pattern determination at the time of failure).
In the failure variation pattern determination, first, the failure variation pattern determination table determined by the failure variation mode determination is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the start determination target game information and the read-out failure variation pattern determination table.

In step S11-13, a variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-14. In the variation pattern command setting process, a variation mode designation command designating the variation mode number (type of variation mode) determined in step S11-12 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
Also, a variation pattern designation command designating the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) determined in step S11-12 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-14, a special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-15. In the special figure fluctuation time setting process, the time for the special symbol fluctuation display is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation time setting process, first, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation mode number determined in step S11-12 (hereinafter referred to as "variation time 1") is acquired.
Also, the variation time (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 2”) corresponding to the variation pattern number determined in step S11-12 is obtained.
Then, the total time of the acquired variable time 1 and variable time 2 is calculated, and the calculated total time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed.

In step S11-15, a special figure variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-16. In the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display device corresponding to the pattern to be processed is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set to the special figure display timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed.
Next, when the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", a predetermined initial value is set to the special figure 2 display symbol counter. By this, lighting control of the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 2 display pattern counter is performed among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device.
On the other hand, when the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", a predetermined initial value is set to the special figure 1 display symbol counter. By this, lighting control of the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display pattern counter is performed among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device.

At step S11-16, game state update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-17. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is being executed. At this time, if the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", it is determined that the time saving control is being performed, and if it is "0", it is determined that the time saving control is not being performed. do.
When it is determined that the time saving control is being executed, "1" is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter, and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter after subtraction is "0" or less.
And when it determines with the value of the time saving counter after subtraction being below "0", "0" is set to a time saving control flag area|region. This terminates the time saving control.
On the other hand, when it determines with the value of a time saving counter not being below "0", the state in which "1" is set to the time saving control flag area|region is maintained. As a result, the time saving control continues.
In the game state update process, next, it is determined whether or not the special figure high probability state is occurring. At this time, if the value set in the special figure high probability state flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", it is determined that the special figure high probability state is occurring, and if it is "0", the special figure It is determined that the high-probability state is not occurring.
When it is determined that the special figure high probability state is occurring, "1" is subtracted from the value of the variable probability counter, and it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter after subtraction is "0" or less.
And, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter after subtraction is "0" or less, "0" is set to the special figure high probability state flag area. By this, the special figure high probability state is ended, and the special figure low probability state is caused.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" or less, the state in which "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area is maintained. By this, the special figure high probability state continues.

In step S11-17, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3) is performed.
In the special game phase update process, if the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area, the value corresponding to "special figure 2 fluctuating state" set.
On the other hand, when the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area, a value corresponding to "special figure 1 fluctuating state" is set.
In step S11-18, a customer waiting setting process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3) is performed. In the customer waiting setting process, the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 stores a demonstration designation command designating that the customer waiting state has started for the pattern to be processed.

(Processing during special figure fluctuation)
Next, the processing during special figure fluctuation executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure fluctuation.
When the special figure fluctuation process is executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5, as shown in FIG. 26, the process first proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is not "0" If (No), the process proceeds to step S12-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether the value of the special figure display timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "0", and if the value of the special figure display timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "0" When it is determined (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is not "0" (No), a series of processes is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3).
In step S12-3, a special figure variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3) is performed. In the special figure fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device or special figure 2 display device) corresponding to the pattern to be processed is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation display data update process, when the value set in the target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", "1" is added to the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter.
On the other hand, in the special figure fluctuation display data update process, when the value set in the target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", "1" is added to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter.

In step S12-4, the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "big hit pattern"("big hit pattern 1" to "big hit pattern 4") or "small hit pattern"("small hit pattern"). If the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed designates the "big hit pattern" or the "small hit pattern". When it is determined (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-5, and the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed does not designate the "big hit pattern" or the "small hit pattern". If it is determined that (the "lost pattern" is specified) (No), the process proceeds to step S12-8.
Here, if the value set in the process target pattern determination flag area is "1", the symbol information stored in the special figure 2 symbol information storage area, "big hit design" or "small hit design" It is determined whether or not it is specified.
On the other hand, if the value set in the process target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", specify "big hit pattern" or "small hit pattern" for the pattern information stored in the special figure 1 pattern information storage area. It is determined whether or not
In step S12-5, it is determined whether or not the non-processed symbols are being variably displayed (during the variable time), and if it is determined that the non-processed symbols are being variably displayed (Yes), step S12. If the process proceeds to -6 and it is determined that the non-processed symbols are not displayed in a variable manner (No), the process proceeds to step S12-8.
Here, when the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", based on the value set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area, during the fluctuation display of the non-process target symbol It is determined whether there is At this time, if the value set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area is a value corresponding to the "special figure 1 varying state", it is determined that the non-processed pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is not a value corresponding to "special figure 1 fluctuating state", it is determined that the non-processed pattern is not being displayed in a fluctuating manner.
On the other hand, if the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", based on the value set in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area, the non-process target symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It is determined whether or not At this time, if the value set in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area is a value corresponding to the "special figure 2 changing state", it is determined that the non-processed pattern is being displayed in fluctuation, If it is not a value corresponding to "special figure 2 fluctuating state", it is determined that the non-processed pattern is not being displayed in a fluctuating manner.

In step S12-6, a non-processed pattern rewriting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the non-processed pattern rewriting process, the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area (special figure 1 pattern information storage area or special figure 2 pattern information storage area) corresponding to the non-processed pattern Rewrite to the specified pattern information.
Specifically, in the non-processed design rewriting process, when the value set in the processed design determination flag area is "1", the design information stored in the special figure 1 design information storage area is "off Design" is rewritten to the design information that specifies it. Also, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol is rewritten to the stop symbol number corresponding to the "missing symbol".
On the other hand, when the value set in the pattern discrimination flag area to be processed is "0", the pattern information stored in the special figure 2 pattern information storage area is rewritten to the pattern information designating the "missing pattern". Also, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol is rewritten to the stop symbol number corresponding to the "missing symbol".
In step S12-7, non-processed symbol stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-8. In the non-processed symbol stop process, "0" is set as the value of the special game timer (timer measuring the fluctuation time) corresponding to the non-processed symbol.
Specifically, in the non-processed symbol stop process, when the value set in the processed symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the special game timer corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) Set "0" as the value. As a result, in the next special figure 1 special game management process (step S10-2), the variable display of the first special symbol is ended, and the stop display of the "missing symbol" is started.
On the other hand, when the value set in the target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", "0" is set as the value of the special game timer corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information). As a result, in the next special figure 2 special game management process (step S10-1), the variable display of the second special symbol is ended, and the stop display of the "missing symbol" is started.

In step S12-8, a special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-9. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display device corresponding to the pattern to be processed is set.
Specifically, in the special figure stop display data setting process, the stop design number stored in the stop design number storage area corresponding to the process target design is obtained. And, the acquired stop design number is set to the special figure display device corresponding to the processing object design.
At this time, when the value set in the target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) to get And, the acquired stop design number is set to the special figure 2 display device. Thereby, lighting control (stop display) is performed for the segment corresponding to the set stop design number among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device.
On the other hand, when the value set in the target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is get. And, the acquired stop design number is set to the special figure 1 display device. Thereby, lighting control (stop display) is performed for the segment corresponding to the set stop design number among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device.

In step S12-9, a special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-10. In the special figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set to the special game timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed.
In step S12-10, a stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-11. In the stop designation command setting process, a stop designation command that designates the stop of the symbol to be processed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a predetermined number (1 [times] in the present embodiment) is added to the value of the external information fixed number counter.
In step S12-11, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3) is performed.
In the special game phase update process, if the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area, the value corresponding to "special figure 2 stop symbol display state" set.
On the other hand, when the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area, a value corresponding to "special figure 1 stop symbol display state" is set.

(Processing during special stoppage)
Next, the special figure stopping process executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure stop.
When the special figure stopping process is executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5, as shown in FIG. 27, the process first proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed is "0", and the value of the special game timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed is "0". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next Processing (steps S10-2, S10-3) is performed.
In step S13-2, it is determined whether or not the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed designates "big hit pattern"("big hit pattern 1" to "big hit pattern 4"). If it is determined that the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed designates the "jackpot symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-3, and the symbol to be processed. If it is determined that the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to does not specify the "big hit symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-8.
Here, if the value set in the process target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", whether or not "big hit pattern" is specified for the pattern information stored in the special figure 2 pattern information storage area is determined.
On the other hand, if the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", whether or not the "big hit symbol" is specified for the symbol information stored in the special figure 1 symbol information storage area is determined. be judged.
At step S13-3, game state update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-4. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, "0" is set to the special figure high probability state flag area of the RAM230. This causes a special figure low probability state. Moreover, "0" is set to the time saving control flag area|region of RAM230. By this, it will be in the state where time saving control was stopped. As a result, the game state becomes "game state A".

In step S13-4, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the first special electric role item 54a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "jackpot pattern"("jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 4"). Each special electric role control table contains the effective time for closing the big winning opening, the closing time for the big winning opening, the number of round games, the number of open/close switching times corresponding to each round game, and the first big winning corresponding to each open/close switching. Control data (solenoid control data, control time data) of the opening solenoid 65a, control data (solenoid control data, control time data) of the V area solenoid 66 during the V round game, etc. are defined.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "jackpot symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed is read, and the read special electric role control table is read. A role control table is set in the special role control table area of the RAM 230 .
At this time, if the value set in the process target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a special pattern corresponding to the type of "big hit pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special figure 2 pattern information storage area It reads out the electric service control table and sets the read special electric service control table in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 .
On the other hand, if the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the special call corresponding to the type of "big hit symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the special figure 1 symbol information storage area The special electric role control table is read, and the read special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 .
In the special electric service control data setting process, next, the special electric service continuous operation counter is set to "0".

At step S13-5, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-6. In the opening time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S13-6, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command designating the type of "jackpot design" designated by the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed is stored in a subcommand output request buffer. Also, a predetermined number (1 [times] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the external information jackpot number counter.
At this time, if the value set in the process target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the opening that specifies the type of "big hit pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special figure 2 pattern information storage area Stores the specified command in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing object pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the opening specification that specifies the type of "big hit pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special figure 1 pattern information storage area Stores the command in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S13-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3) is performed.
In the special game phase update process, first, the symbol information set in the symbol information storage area (special figure 1 symbol information storage area or special figure 2 symbol information storage area) corresponding to the symbol to be processed is converted to the confirmed symbol information of the RAM 230. After setting (saving) in the storage area, clear (initialize) the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed. At this time, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information designating a "lost pattern") is set in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed.
That is, if the value set in the process target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", after setting (saving) the pattern information set in the special figure 2 pattern information storage area in the confirmed pattern information storage area , In the special figure 2 symbol information storage area, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, symbol information that designates a "missing symbol") is set.
On the other hand, if the value set in the process target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", after setting (saving) the pattern information set in the special figure 1 pattern information storage area in the fixed pattern information storage area , In the special figure 1 symbol information storage area, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, symbol information that designates a "missing symbol") is set.
In addition, in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening at the time of big win" is set.
Furthermore, when the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area, a value corresponding to "special figure 2 fluctuation waiting state" is set.
On the other hand, when the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area, a value corresponding to "special figure 1 fluctuation waiting state" is set.

In step S13-8, it is determined whether or not the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed designates a "small winning pattern"("small winning pattern 1"). When it is determined that the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol designates the "small hit symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-9, and the symbol corresponding to the symbol to be processed is determined. If it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area does not designate the "small winning pattern" (designates the "losing pattern") (No), the process proceeds to step S13-13. .
Here, if the value set in the process target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", whether or not the "small hit pattern" is specified for the pattern information stored in the special figure 2 pattern information storage area is determined.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing object pattern discrimination flag area is "0", whether or not the "small hit pattern" is specified for the pattern information stored in the special figure 1 pattern information storage area is determined.

In step S13-9, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the second special electric role item 55a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "small winning symbol". In the special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "small winning pattern", the effective time for closing the big winning opening, the closing time for the big winning opening, the number of small winning games, the number of open/close switching corresponding to each small winning game, Control data (solenoid control data, control time data) and the like of the second big winning opening solenoid 65b corresponding to opening/closing switching of each time are defined.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "small winning symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed is read, and the read special electric role control table is read. The electric service control table is set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 .
At this time, if the value set in the process target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the pattern information stored in the special figure 2 pattern information storage area is specified. The special electric role control table is read, and the read special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 .
On the other hand, if the value set in the process target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the special pattern corresponding to the type of "small hit pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special figure 1 pattern information storage area It reads out the electric service control table and sets the read special electric service control table in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 .
In the special electric service control data setting process, next, the special electric service continuous operation counter is set to "0".

In step S13-10, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-11. In the opening time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S13-11, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-12. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command designating the type of "small winning design" designated by the design information stored in the design information storage area corresponding to the design to be processed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. .
At this time, if the value set in the process object pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the type of "small winning pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special figure 2 pattern information storage area is specified. Stores the opening specification command in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if the value set in the process target pattern determination flag area is "0", the opening that specifies the type of "small hit pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special figure 1 pattern information storage area Stores the specified command in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S13-12, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3) is performed.
In the special game phase update process, first, the symbol information set in the symbol information storage area (special figure 1 symbol information storage area or special figure 2 symbol information storage area) corresponding to the symbol to be processed is converted to the confirmed symbol information of the RAM 230. After setting (saving) in the storage area, the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed is cleared (initialized). At this time, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information designating a "lost pattern") is set in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed.
That is, if the value set in the process target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", after setting (saving) the pattern information set in the special figure 2 pattern information storage area in the confirmed pattern information storage area , In the special figure 2 symbol information storage area, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, symbol information that designates a "missing symbol") is set.
On the other hand, if the value set in the process target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", after setting (saving) the pattern information set in the special figure 1 pattern information storage area in the fixed pattern information storage area , In the special figure 1 symbol information storage area, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, symbol information that designates a "missing symbol") is set.
In addition, in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening at the time of small win" is set.
Furthermore, when the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area, a value corresponding to "special figure 2 fluctuation waiting state" is set.
On the other hand, when the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area, a value corresponding to "special figure 1 fluctuation waiting state" is set.
In step S13-13, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3) is performed.
In the special game phase update process, first, clear (initialize) the symbol information storage area (special figure 1 symbol information storage area or special figure 2 symbol information storage area) corresponding to the symbol to be processed. At this time, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information designating a "failed pattern") is set in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed.
That is, when the value set in the process target pattern determination flag area is "1", in the special figure 2 pattern information storage area, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "off design" design information designating ).
On the other hand, if the value set in the process target symbol determination flag area is "0", in the special figure 1 symbol information storage area, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, the symbol information that specifies the "missing symbol" ).
In addition, when the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area, a value corresponding to "special figure 2 fluctuation waiting state" is set.
On the other hand, when the value set in the process target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area, a value corresponding to "special figure 1 fluctuation waiting state" is set.

(Pre-processing for opening the big prize pool)
Next, the big winning opening pre-opening process executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the pre-opening processing for the big winning opening.
When the big winning hole pre-opening process is executed in step S42-4, as shown in FIG. 28, the process first proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the game when winning is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the game when winning is "0". If (Yes), the process proceeds to step S14-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next step is performed. The process (step S4-14) is entered.
In step S14-2, special electric service continuous operation number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter.
In step S14-3, a round start specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start designation command setting process, the round start designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a process for setting the number of opening/closing switching times for special electric power is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric service open/close switching number setting process, the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the open/close switching number corresponding to the value of the special service continuous operation counter is read. . Then, the opening/closing switching frequency read out is set in the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter.
In the special electric role switching frequency setting process, next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric role winning number counter.
In step S14-5, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening opening control state at the time of big hit" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning.

(Big prize opening control process)
Next, the big winning opening opening control process executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening control process.
When the big winning hole opening control process is executed in step S42-4, as shown in FIG. 29, the process first proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the game when winning is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the game when winning is "0". If (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S16-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric role winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S16-5, a special winning opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the big winning opening opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the first special electric accessory 54a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S16-6, a special winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the large winning opening closing effective time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined large winning opening closing valid time (interval time) is set to the winning time game. Set to the special game timer corresponding to.
In step S16-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end designation command setting process, the round end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening closed valid state at the time of big hit" is set.

(Special electric service opening/closing switching processing)
Next, the special electric power opening/closing switching processing in steps S14-5 and S16-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the special electric service open/close switching process.
When the special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, as shown in FIG. 30, the process first proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service open/close switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S15-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service open/close switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S14-6 , S16-4).

In step S15-2, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the first special electric role item 54a to be in an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control data setting process, the special electric service control table set in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the solenoid control corresponding to the value of the special service open/close switching number counter is performed. Read data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the control of the first big winning opening solenoid 65a based on the set solenoid data is started, and the first special electric accessory 54a is controlled to be open or closed.

In step S15-3, a special electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric service control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control time setting process, the special electric service control table set in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and control corresponding to the value of the special service open/close switching counter is performed. read out the time. Then, the read control time is set to the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S15-4, a special electric power opening/closing switching frequency counter update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4). In the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter.

(Large winning mouth closing effective processing)
Next, a description will be given of the big winning opening closing valid process executed in step S42-4.
FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening closing effective process.
When the big winning opening closing valid process is executed in step S42-4, as shown in FIG. 31, the process first proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the game when winning is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the game when winning is "0". If (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next step is performed. The process (step S4-14) is entered.
In step S17-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No ), the process proceeds to step S17-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-5.
Here, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the number of round games specified in the special electric role control table is acquired as a specified value to make a determination. .
In step S17-3, a big winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-4. In the special winning opening closing time setting process, a special winning opening closing time is set by referring to the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230, and a special game timer corresponding to the game at the time of winning is set. set to
In step S17-4, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening at the time of the big hit" is set.

In step S17-5, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the ending time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S17-6, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the ending specifying command setting process, the ending specifying command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to the "big winning opening end wait state at the time of big hit" is set.

(Wait processing for end of big winning opening opening)
Next, the wait process for ending the opening of the big winning opening executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the waiting process for ending the opening of the big winning opening.
When the big winning opening end wait process is executed in step S42-4, as shown in FIG. 32, the process first proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the game when winning is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the game when winning is "0". If (Yes), the process proceeds to step S18-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next step is performed. The process (step S4-14) is entered.
At step S18-2, game state setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the game state setting process, the game state after the jackpot game state is ended is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, first, the probability state setting process is executed.
In the probability state setting process, first, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230 .
Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, "1" is added to the value of the limiter number counter, and then the value of the limiter number counter becomes the specified value (this embodiment). Then, it is determined whether or not "4") has been reached.
Then, when it is determined that the value of the limiter number counter has not reached the specified value, as the value of the probability variation number counter, set a predetermined probability variation number (in this embodiment, 10000 [times]) and set a special figure high probability Set "1" in the status flag area. By this, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes a special figure high probability state.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the limiter number counter has reached the specified value, set "0" to the special figure high probability state flag area, and set "1" to the limiter number reached flag area of RAM 230, Thereafter, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the limiter number counter. By this, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes a special figure low probability state.
On the other hand, when it is determined that "1" is not set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230 ("0" is set), "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area, and the limiter A predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the number counter. By this, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes a special figure low probability state.

In the game state setting process, next, a time saving number setting process is executed.
In the time saving frequency setting process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the limiter frequency reaching flag area of the RAM 230 .
Then, if it is determined that "1" is set in the limiter number reaching flag area, the number of times of time saving = 0 [times] is set in the time saving counter, and "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. do.
On the other hand, if it is determined that "1" is not set in the limiter count reaching flag area ("0" is set), the stop symbol specified by the symbol information stored in the confirmed symbol information storage area (" Check the type of "jackpot pattern"), the game state at the time of start judgment (at the time of judgment of special hit), and the value of the V prize flag area, and set the number of times of time saving according to the confirmation result to the time saving counter do.
At this time, when the stop symbol = "jackpot symbol 1", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V prize flag area = "0" or "1" , The number of times of time saving = 50 [times] is set in the time saving counter, and "1" is set in the time saving control flag area.
On the other hand, when the stop pattern = "jackpot pattern 2", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A", and the value of the V winning flag area = "0" or "1", the number of times of time saving = 0 [times ] is set in the time saving counter, and "0" is set in the time saving control flag area.
On the other hand, the stop symbol = "jackpot symbol 2", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state B", "game state C" or "game state D", and the value of the V prize flag area = "1". In this case, the number of times of time saving = 10000 [times] is set in the time saving counter, and "1" is set in the time saving control flag area.
On the other hand, the stop symbol = "jackpot symbol 2", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state B", "game state C" or "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "0". In this case, the number of times of working hours = 100 [times] is set to the working hours counter, and "1" is set to the working hours control flag area.
On the other hand, when the stop symbol = "jackpot symbol 3", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "0" or "1", Time saving frequency =50 [times] is set in the time saving counter, and "1" is set in the time saving control flag area.
On the other hand, when the stop pattern = "jackpot pattern 4", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A", and the value of the V winning flag area = "1", the number of times of time saving = 10000 [times] A counter is set, and "1" is set in the time saving control flag area.
On the other hand, when the stop pattern = "jackpot pattern 4", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A", and the value of the V winning flag area = "0", the number of times of time saving = 100 [times] A counter is set, and "1" is set in the time saving control flag area.
On the other hand, the stop symbol = "jackpot symbol 4", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state B", "game state C" or "game state D", and the value of the V prize flag area = "1". In this case, the number of times of working hours = 50 [times] is set to the working hours counter, and "1" is set to the working hours control flag area.
On the other hand, the stop symbol = "jackpot symbol 4", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state B", "game state C" or "game state D", and the value of the V prize flag area = "0". In this case, the number of times of working hours = 0 [times] is set to the working hours counter, and "0" is set to the working hours control flag area.
As a result, when "0" is set in the time saving control flag area, after the end of the big hit game state, the time saving control is not executed, and when "1" is set in the time saving control flag area, the end of the big hit game state Shortening of working hours control is performed later.

In the game state setting process, next, a flag initialization process is executed.
In the flag initialization process, "0" is set in the V winning flag area, and "0" is set in the limiter number of times reached flag area.
As described above, one of the "game state A" to "game state D" is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game state.

In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, first, clear (initialize) the fixed symbol information storage area. In addition, in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to the "special electric auditors non-operating state" is set.

(Pre-processing for opening the big winning opening at the time of a small hit)
Next, the pre-opening process for opening the big winning opening at the time of a small hit, which is executed in step S42-4, will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the pre-opening process for the big winning opening at the time of the small hit.
When the small hit time big winning opening pre-opening process is executed in step S42-4, as shown in FIG. 33, first, the process proceeds to step S50-1.
In step S50-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the game when winning is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the game when winning is "0". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S50-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next step is performed. The process (step S4-14) is entered.
In step S50-2, special electric service continuous operation number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-3. In the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter.
In step S50-3, a round start specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-4. In the round start designation command setting process, the round start designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S50-4, a process for setting the number of times of opening/closing of the special electric service is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-5. In the special electric service open/close switching number setting process, the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the open/close switching number corresponding to the value of the special service continuous operation counter is read. . Then, the opening/closing switching frequency read out is set in the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter.
In the special electric role switching frequency setting process, next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric role winning number counter.
In step S50-5, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S50-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening opening control state at the time of small hit" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning.

(Large winning opening control process at the time of small hit)
Next, the small winning big winning opening opening control process executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a small winning big winning opening opening control process.
When the small hit big winning opening opening control process is executed in step S42-4, as shown in FIG.
In step S51-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the game when winning is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the game when winning is "0". If (Yes), the process proceeds to step S51-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S51-4.
In step S51-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S51-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S51-5.
In step S51-3, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S51-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S51-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric role winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S51-5. ends the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S51-5, a special winning opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S51-6. In the big winning opening opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . Thereby, the second special electric accessory 55a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S51-6, a special winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S51-7. In the large winning opening closing effective time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined large winning opening closing valid time (interval time) is set to the winning time game. Set to the special game timer corresponding to.
In step S51-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S51-8. In the round end designation command setting process, the round end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S51-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening closing effective state at the time of small winning" is set.

(Special electric service open/close switching process)
Next, the special electric power open/close switching process in steps S50-5 and S51-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the special electric service open/close switching process.
When the special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S50-5 and S51-3, as shown in FIG. 35, the process first proceeds to step S52-1.
In step S52-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service open/close switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S52-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service open/close switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S50-6 , S51-4).

In step S52-2, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S52-3. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the second special electric role item 55a to be in an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control data setting process, the special electric service control table set in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the solenoid control corresponding to the value of the special service open/close switching number counter is performed. Read data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, control of the second big winning opening solenoid 65b based on the set solenoid data is started, and the second special electric accessory 55a is controlled to be in the open state or the closed state.

In step S52-3, a special electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S52-4. In the special electric service control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S52-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control time setting process, the special electric service control table set in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and control corresponding to the value of the special service open/close switching counter is performed. read out the time. Then, the read control time is set to the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S52-4, a special electric power opening/closing switching frequency counter update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S50-6 or S51-4). In the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter.

(Effective processing for closing the big winning opening at the time of a small hit)
Next, the small winning big winning opening closing effective process executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing a small winning big winning opening closing effective process.
When the small hit big winning opening closing valid process is executed in step S42-4, as shown in FIG. 36, first, the process proceeds to step S53-1.
In step S53-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the game when winning is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the game when winning is "0". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S53-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next step is performed. The process (step S4-14) is entered.

In step S53-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No ), the process proceeds to step S53-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S53-5.
Here, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the number of round games specified in the special electric role control table is acquired as a specified value to make a determination. .
In step S53-3, a big winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S53-4. In the special winning opening closing time setting process, a special winning opening closing time is set by referring to the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230, and a special game timer corresponding to the game at the time of winning is set. set to
In step S53-4, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening at the time of small hit" is set.

In step S53-5, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S53-6. In the ending time setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S53-6, an ending specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S53-7. In the ending specifying command setting process, the ending specifying command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S53-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to the "wait state for closing the big winning opening at the time of the small win" is set.

(Wait processing for ending the opening of the big winning opening at the time of the small hit)
Next, the wait process for ending the opening of the big winning opening at the time of the small hit, which is executed in step S42-4, will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing a wait process for ending the big winning opening opening at the time of a small hit.
When the small hit time big winning opening end wait process is executed in step S42-4, as shown in FIG. 37, the process first proceeds to step S54-1.
In step S54-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the game when winning is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the game when winning is "0". If (Yes), the process proceeds to step S54-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next step is performed. The process (step S4-14) is entered.
In step S54-2, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, first, the fixed symbol information storage area is cleared (initialized). In addition, in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to the "special electric auditors non-operating state" is set.

(Normal game management processing)
Next, the normal game management process of step S4-14 will be explained.
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing normal game management processing.
In the present embodiment, as a phase (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary diagram normal game phase") related to the game based on the normal diagram display device (normal pattern), "normal diagram fluctuation waiting state" and "normal diagram fluctuation state" , "Normal figure stop symbol display state" is defined.
In addition, as a phase (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phase at the time of winning") related to the game based on the normal electric role 53a (game state per normal), "normal electric role before opening state" and "normal electric role Accessory open control state", "normal electric accessory closed valid state", "normal electric accessory open end wait state", and "normal electric accessory non-operating state" are defined.

Further, the RAM 230 is provided with a normal game phase flag area and a normal game phase flag area when winning.
In the general pattern normal game phase flag area, the value corresponding to one general pattern normal game phase (normal Figure normal game phase flag) is set (stored). By this, based on the value that is set in the general figure normal game phase flag area, it is possible to specify the general figure normal game phase (determination).
In the normal game phase flag area at the time of winning, "normal figure electric accessory opening state", "normal figure electric accessory open control state", "normal figure electric accessory closed effective state", "normal figure electric accessory open A value (normal game phase flag at the time of winning) corresponding to one of the normal game phases at the time of winning is set (stored) out of "end wait state" and "normal electric accessory non-operating state". This makes it possible to specify (determine) the normal game phase at the time of winning based on the value set in the normal game phase flag area at the time of winning.

Furthermore, in the ROM 220, as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (executing) a special game, a special game control module corresponding to each normal game phase, and a normal game phase at each winning ("normal electric (Excluding "accessory non-operating state") is stored with a normal game control module.
Then, in the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 (normal figure normal game phase flag area, winning normal game phase flag area) is selected and selected. Processing based on the normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, as shown in FIG. 38, the process first proceeds to step S55-1.
In step S55-1, normal figure normal game management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S55-2. Ordinary figure normal game management processing will be described later.
In step S55-2, normal game management processing at the time of winning is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. The winning normal game management process will be described later.

(Usually normal game management processing)
Next, normal figure normal game management processing executed in step S55-1 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing normal game management processing.
When the general/universal figure normal game management process is executed in step S55-1, as shown in FIG. 39, the process first proceeds to step S56-1.
In step S56-1, it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory is in the non-operating state, and if it is determined that the normal electric accessory is in the non-operating state (Yes), the process proceeds to step S56-2 , If it is determined that it is not in the normal electric accessory non-operating state (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
Here, if the value set in the winning normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the "normal electric role product non-operating state", it is determined that the normal electric role product is in the non-operating state. , If it is not a value corresponding to "normal electric accessory non-operating state", it is determined that it is not in the normal electric accessory non-operating state.

In step S56-2, normal game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S56-3. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal normal game phase) set in the normal normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained (loaded).
In step S56-3, a normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S56-4. In the normal game control module acquisition process, read the special game control module corresponding to the value acquired in step S56-2 (ordinary figure normal game phase).
In step S56-4, a normal game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2). In the normal game control module execution process, the process based on the normal game control module read in step S56-3 is started.
Specifically, in the normal game control module execution process, if the value obtained in step S56-2 is a value corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state", the normal pattern fluctuation waiting process described later is started, If it is a value corresponding to the figure fluctuation state", the normal figure fluctuation process described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "normal figure stop symbol display state", the normal figure stop process described later is started. be.

(Ordinary game management process at the time of winning)
Next, the winning normal game management process executed in step S55-2 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing normal game management processing at the time of winning.
When the win-time normal game management process is executed in step S55-2, as shown in FIG. 40, first, the process proceeds to step S57-1.
In step S57-1, normal game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S57-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase at the time of winning) set in the normal game phase flag area at the time of winning of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S57-2, it is determined whether the value obtained in step S57-1 (ordinary game phase when winning) is a value corresponding to the "ordinary electric role product non-operating state". If it is determined that it is not a value corresponding to "non-operating state" (No), the process proceeds to step S57-3, and if it is determined that it is a value corresponding to "normal electric accessory non-operating state" (Yes) ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S57-3, a normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S57-4. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value acquired in step S57-1 (normal game phase at the time of winning) is read.

In step S57-4, a normal game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In normal game control module execution processing, processing based on the special game control module read out in step S57-3 is started.
Specifically, in the normal game control module execution process, if the value obtained in step S57-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal electric auditors product opening pre-opening state", the normal electric auditors product opening pre-processing described later starts. If the value corresponds to the "ordinary electric auditors open control state", the normal electric auditors open control process to be described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "ordinary electric auditors closed valid state", later If the normal electric accessary product closing effective process is started and the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessary product open end wait state", the normal electric accessary product open end wait process described later is started.

(Normal pattern change waiting process)
Next, the general pattern fluctuation waiting process executed in step S55-1 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing normal pattern change waiting processing.
When normal figure fluctuation waiting processing is executed in step S55-1, as shown in FIG. 41, the process first proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether the value of the general pattern reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the general pattern reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes) , Move to step S20-2, if it is determined that the value of the normal figure pending number counter is not "1" or more (No), end the series of processes and move to the next process (step S55-2) do.
In step S20-2, normal figure pending number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the general pattern reservation number update process, the general pattern reservation number is updated.
Concretely, in the general pattern reservation number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the general pattern reservation number counter.
Next, in the general pattern game information storage area, shift the storage area in which the general pattern game information is stored. That is, first, the memory contents of memory area 1 are shifted (moved) to memory area 0 . Next, the memory contents of the memory area 2 are shifted to the memory area 1. FIG. Next, the memory contents of memory area 3 are shifted to memory area 2 . Next, the contents stored in storage area 4 are shifted to storage area 3 . Next, the contents stored in the storage area 4 are cleared (initialized).

In step S20-3, normal figure hit-lose determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the general pattern hit-loss determination process, in the normal pattern hit-loss determination process, based on the general pattern game information (hereinafter referred to as "determination target game information") stored in the storage area 0 of the general pattern game information storage area, normal Determine the result of the pattern lottery (normal pattern hit/loss determination).
The ROM 220 stores a normal symbol lottery table in which the winning values of the normal symbol lottery are registered. In addition, as the normal figure win-lose lottery table, the normal figure win-lose lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control and the normal figure win-lose lottery table corresponding to the stop of the time saving control are stored.
In the general figure hit-loss determination process, based on the hit random number included in the determination target game information and the general figure hit-loss lottery table corresponding to the current execution status of the time saving control (during execution or stopped), the general figure hit-loss determination to run.
At this time, when the value of the hit random number included in the game information to be determined matches the hit value registered in the normal pattern win-lose lottery table, the result of the normal pattern lottery is determined as "hit" (winning). .
On the other hand, when the value of the winning random number included in the game information to be determined does not match the winning value registered in the normal pattern winning/losing lottery table, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined as ``loss'' (loss).

In step S20-4, normal pattern stop symbol determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal pattern stop symbol determination process, the type of the normal pattern stop symbol (stop symbol number) is determined (normal pattern stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the normal pattern stop design determination process, when it is determined as "hit" (winning) by the normal pattern win-lose determination, "normal pattern winning pattern" is determined as the type of stop design (stop design number).
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the normal design winning/losing determination, "missing design" is determined as the type of stop design (stop design number).
Next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 .
In step S20-5, normal figure fluctuation pattern determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the general pattern variation pattern determination process, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) in the normal pattern is determined (normal pattern variation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process, when the time saving control is stopped, the first type (in this embodiment, 2.0 [ s]) is determined.
On the other hand, when the time saving control is being executed, the second type (in the present embodiment, the type corresponding to the fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) as the type of normal figure fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) judge.

In step S20-6, normal figure fluctuation time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the general pattern fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type of general pattern fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) determined in step S20-6 is obtained. And, the acquired fluctuation time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, normal figure fluctuation display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the general pattern fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the general pattern display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal pattern fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the normal pattern display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the general pattern display symbol counter. As a result, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal pattern display symbol counter among the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal pattern display device is controlled to be lit.
In step S20-8, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S55-2) is performed.
In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area, to set a value corresponding to the "normal figure fluctuation state".

(Normal map fluctuation process)
Next, the process during normal figure fluctuation executed in step S55-1 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing processing during normal pattern fluctuation.
When the normal figure fluctuation process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 42, first, the process proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2. Then, when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal map display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is "0" (Yes), step S21- 3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In step S21-3, normal figure fluctuation display data update processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the next processing (step S55-2) is performed. In the normal pattern fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the variable display of the normal pattern display device is updated.
Specifically, in the general pattern fluctuation display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the general pattern display symbol counter.

In step S21-4, a normal map stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the normal map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the normal map display device is set.
Specifically, in the general pattern stop display data setting process, the stop design number stored in the stop design storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, the acquired stop design number is set as the value of the general-purpose diagram display design counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments that constitute the normal-symbol display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal-symbol display symbol counter is controlled to light up (stopped display).
In step S21-5, normal figure stop time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal figure stop time setting process, the predetermined stop time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S55-2) is performed.
In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area, to set a value corresponding to the "normal figure stop symbol display state".

(Normal map stop processing)
Next, the process during normal figure stop executed in step S55-1 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing processing during normal map stop.
When the normal map stop process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 43, the process first proceeds to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S22-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stopped pattern is the "normal pattern per pattern", and if it is determined that the stopped pattern is not the "normal per pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. However, if it is determined that the stopped symbol is the "normal winning symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed.
In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area, to set a value corresponding to the "normal figure fluctuation waiting state".

In step S22-4, normal electric service control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric role control data setting process, control data for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a normal electric work control table corresponding to the execution status of the time saving control (during execution or during suspension). Each normal electric role control table contains the time before opening the normal electric function, the valid time for closing the normal electric function, the wait time for the end of opening, the number of opening/closing switching times, and the control of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64 corresponding to each opening/closing switching. Data (solenoid control data, control time data) etc. are defined.
In the ordinary electric service control data setting process, the ordinary electric service control table corresponding to the execution status of the time saving control (during execution or being stopped) is read, and the read ordinary electric service control table is stored in the ordinary electric service control table area of the RAM 230. set.
Next, referring to the ordinary electric work control table set in the ordinary electric work control table area of the RAM 230, the opening/closing switching times are read out. Then, the number of open/close switching times read out is set in the normal electric open/close switching number counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the winning number counter for the normal electric role.

At step S22-5, a normal electric service pre-opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the ordinary electric role opening time setting process, the ordinary electric role control table set in the ordinary electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ordinary electric role opening time period is set in the ordinary game timer.
In step S22-6, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S55-2) is performed.
In the normal game phase update process, first, in the normal game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to the "state before normal electric accessary release" is set.
In addition, in the general pattern normal game phase flag area, a value corresponding to the general pattern variation waiting state is set.

(Normal electric accessory opening preprocessing)
Next, the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing executed in step S55-2 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessory opening preprocessing.
When the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing is executed in step S55-2, as shown in FIG. 44, first, the process proceeds to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S23-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, normal electric open/close switching processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The ordinary electric open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed.
In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area at the time of winning, to set a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product open control state".

(Normal electric accessory opening control process)
Next, the normal electric accessary product opening control process executed in step S55-2 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessory opening control processing.
When the normal electric accessary product opening control process is executed in step S55-2, as shown in FIG. 45, the process first proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S25-2 If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is "0". If it is determined that the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is not "0" (No) , the process proceeds to step S25-3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, normal electric open/close switching processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4. The ordinary electric open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (3 [ball] in this embodiment), and the value of the normal electric winning number counter reaches a predetermined value. If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, normal electric power opening control end processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric power opening control end process, solenoid control data designating de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the normal electric accessory 53a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S25-6, normal electric service closing effective time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the ordinary electric role closing valid time setting process, the ordinary electric role closing valid time is set in the ordinary game timer by referring to the ordinary electric role control table set in the ordinary electric role control table area of the RAM 230 .
In step S25-7, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed.
In normal game phase update processing, in the normal game phase flag area at the time of winning, to set a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product closing valid state".

(Normal electrical open/close switching process)
Next, the normal electric open/close switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the ordinary electric open/close switching process.
When the ordinary electric open/close switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 46, the process first proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is "0". If it is determined that the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is not "0" (No), , the process proceeds to step S24-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S23-3 , S25-4).
In step S24-2, normal electric service control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the ordinary electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the ordinary electric accessory 53a to be in an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric power control data setting process, the normal electric power control table set in the normal electric power control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal electric power open/close switching frequency counter is selected. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the control of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the normal electric accessory 53a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S24-3, normal electric service control time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric power control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the ordinary electric service control time setting process, the ordinary electric service control table set in the ordinary electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the control time corresponding to the value of the ordinary service open/close switching frequency counter is calculated. read out. Then, the read control time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, normal electric switch opening/closing number counter update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (steps S23-3, S25-4) is performed. In the regular electric switch opening/closing switching number counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the ordinary electric switch opening/closing number counter.

(Normal electric accessories closing effective processing)
Next, the normal electric accessary product closing valid process executed in step S55-2 will be described.
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product closing valid processing.
When the normal electric accessary product closing valid process is executed in step S55-2, as shown in FIG. 47, the process first proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S26-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S26-2, an opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the opening end wait time setting process, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening end wait time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S26-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed.
In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product open end wait state" is set.

(Normal electric accessory opening end wait process)
Next, the normal electric accessary product opening end wait process executed in step S55-2 will be described.
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product opening end wait processing.
When the normal electric accessary product opening end wait process is executed in step S55-2, as shown in FIG. 48, the process first proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S27-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed.
In normal game phase update processing, in the normal game phase flag area at the time of winning, to set a value corresponding to the "normal electric auditors non-operating state".

(Performance display device control processing)
Next, the performance display device control processing at step S4-25 will be described.
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing performance display device control processing.
The performance display device control processing is processing based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 . That is, the performance display device control processing is processing based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220 . Performance display device control processing is called during execution of timer interrupt processing.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, as shown in FIG. 49, the process proceeds to step S38-1.
In step S38-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-2. In the register saving process, the values of all the registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to the saving area of the RAM. Also, the values of all stack pointers used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved in the save area of the RAM.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S38-11.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the game ready status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.
In step S38-3, total out counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the total count counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the OUT switch 109 has been detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the total out counter is not added.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not it is in a predetermined game state, and if it is determined that it is in a predetermined game state (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-5, and it is determined that it is not in a predetermined game state. If so (No), the process proceeds to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined game state" is a game state in which the "special low probability state" has occurred, the time saving control is stopped, and the jackpot game state has not occurred. .
In step S38-5, normal out counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out switch 109 has been detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the OUT switch 109 is detected, "1" is added to the value of the normal OUT counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the OUT switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the normal OUT counter is not added.

In step S38-6, normal prize ball counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball to the first start port 51. Add "4". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is not detected, the value of the normal ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the first special figure 2 starting port switch 102a is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the first special figure 2 start port switch 102a is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entering ball of the game ball to the second start port 52 is added. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the first special figure 2 starting port switch 102a is not detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the second special figure 2 starting port switch 102b is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the second special figure 2 start port switch 102b is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball to the third start port 53 is added. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the second special figure 2 starting port switch 102b is not detected, the value of the normal ball counter is not added.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the right winning opening switch winning ball 105 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the right winning hole switch winning ball 105 is detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is the number of winning balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the right other winning hole 56. Add "4". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the right winning hole switch winning ball 105 is not detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the left winning hole switch winning ball 106 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the left winning hole switch winning ball 106 is detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is added to the number of winning balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the left other winning holes 57a to 57c. is added. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the left winning hole switch winning ball 106 is not detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is not added.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), step S38-8. , and when it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-9.
In this embodiment, the reference value=60000×n (n=integer). "n" is a value indicating the current section, and is set to "1" as an initial value.
In step S38-8, section update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the section update process, first, the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to the base value buffer 2 of the RAM 230 .
Next, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal out counter. Also, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal winning ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current interval. This updates the reference value.

At step S38-9, a base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal ball counter. Then, the calculated base ratio is stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 .
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal winning ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

At step S38-10, base ratio display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with an identification segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, which base ratio is to be displayed is selected from among the base ratio of the current section and the base ratio of the previous section.
Then, when the display of the base ratio of the current section is selected, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set to Set to ratio segment output request buffer.

Specifically, the display data of "b" (8 bits) is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data of "b" (8 bits) is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. , the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to The display data corresponding to the ones digit of is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 33 to 40, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 41 to 48, and the current state is displayed by the LEDs 49 to 56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio is displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64 .

On the other hand, if the display of the base ratio of the previous section is selected, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set to Set to ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "b" (8 bits) is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data of "c" (8 bits) is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. , the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to The display data corresponding to the ones digit of is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 33 to 40, the character "c" is displayed by the LEDs 41 to 48, and the current state is displayed by the LEDs 49 to 56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio is displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64 .

In step S38-11, register restoration processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-12. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S38-1 (the value of the register used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the The value of the saved stack pointer (the value of the stack pointer used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.
At step S38-12, an interrupt permission process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-26). In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. As a result, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Various productions executed in pachinko machine 1)
Next, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

(holding performance)
First, the suspension effect (suspension display) executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, each game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) stored in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area and special figure 2 game information storage area) A pending effect is executed.
The suspension effect is that the notification display (start determination) of the special symbol based on the game information that is the target of the suspension effect (hereinafter referred to as "reserved effect target game information") is suspended, or the suspension effect It is a production that suggests (notifies) that the notification display (variable display or stop display) of the special symbol based on the target game information is being executed.
In the pending effect, the pending symbol h corresponding to the pending effect target game information is displayed in the pending symbol display areas b1 and b2.

Specifically, in the reserved design display area b1, as a display position (display unit) where the reserved design h is displayed, five storage areas (storage area 0 to storage area 4) of the special figure 1 game information storage area Display positions corresponding to each are defined.
Also, in the reserved design display area b2, as a display position (display unit) where the reserved design h is displayed, it corresponds to each of the five storage areas (storage area 0 to storage area 4) of the special figure 2 game information storage area display position is specified.
Then, in the pending effect with the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) as the target pending effect target game information, the pending symbol h corresponding to the pending effect target game information is displayed in the pending symbol display area b1.
That is, during the period in which the pending effect target game information is stored in each storage area (storage area 0 to storage area 4), the pending effect target A reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information is displayed.
Thereby, in the reserved design display area b1, in the positions corresponding to the storage areas 1 to 4 respectively, the reserved design corresponding to the special design 1 game information in which the notification display (start determination) of the special design is reserved h is displayed, and at the position corresponding to the storage area 0, the reserved design h corresponding to the special figure 1 game information during execution of the notification display (variation display or stop display) of the special design is displayed.
On the other hand, in the pending effect with the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) as the target pending effect target game information, the pending symbol h corresponding to the pending effect target game information is displayed in the pending symbol display area b2.
That is, during the period in which the pending effect target game information is stored in each storage area (storage area 0 to storage area 4), the pending effect target A reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information is displayed.
Thereby, in the reserved design display area b2, in the positions corresponding to the storage areas 1 to 4 respectively, the reserved design corresponding to the special design 2 game information in which the notification display (start determination) of the special design is reserved h is displayed, and at the position corresponding to the storage area 0, the reserved design h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information during execution of the notification display (variable display or stop display) of the special design is displayed.

For example, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area as the special figure 1 game information, and the holding effect for the special figure 1 game information is executed. In this case, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed at the position corresponding to the storage area 3 in the reserved symbol display area b1 in accordance with the start of the reserved effect.
After that, the display position of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is shifted from the storage area 3 to the storage area 2 in response to the storage area storing the reserved effect target game information being shifted to the storage area 3. is shifted from the position corresponding to the storage area 2 to the position corresponding to the storage area 2 .
Further, in accordance with the shift of the storage area for storing the pending effect target game information from the storage area 2 to the storage area 1, the display position of the pending pattern h corresponding to the pending effect target game information is shifted to the storage area 2. is shifted from the position corresponding to the storage area 1 to the position corresponding to the storage area 1 .
Further, the display position of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is shifted from the storage area 1 to the storage area 0 in response to the storage area storing the reserved effect target game information being shifted to the storage area 1. is shifted to a position corresponding to storage area 0.
Then, according to the end of the stop display of the special symbols based on the reserved effect target game information, the display of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information in the reserved pattern display area b1 (the position corresponding to the storage area 0) ends. be done. This completes the pending effect.

In this embodiment, a normal pending effect and a pending notice effect are defined as types of the pending effect.
"Normal suspension effect" is a type of suspension effect that does not suggest the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the game information for suspension effect.
In this embodiment, as the types (modes) of the reserved symbol h, normal reserve and special reserve are defined.
In the normal pending effect, normal pending is displayed as the pending pattern h corresponding to the game information targeted for the pending effect.
The normal pending effect is that the game information for the pending effect (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is stored in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) , and ends in response to the end of the stop display of the special symbols based on the reserved effect target game information.

(Holding notice effect)
The "holding notice effect" is a kind of look-ahead notice effect. That is, the pending notice effect is a type of pending effect that suggests the result of preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on predetermined game information by the mode (display mode) of the pending pattern h corresponding to the game information. there is
In the following description, the game information targeted for the suspension notice effect is referred to as "suspension notice target game information". Further, the pending symbol h corresponding to the pending notice target game information is referred to as the "notice target pending symbol hy".
The pending notice effect is a effect suggesting the result of advance special symbol design determination (specifically, the possibility of being a "jackpot symbol") based on the pending notice target game information.
It should be noted that the suspension notice effect may be configured to suggest the result of prior special figure variation pattern determination (specifically, the possibility of being "super reach variation") based on the suspension notice target game information.
In the suspension notice effect, a special suspension is displayed as the notice object suspension pattern hy.
In this embodiment, "blue reservation", "green reservation", "purple reservation", and "red reservation" are defined as special reservation modes (types).
Then, in the pending notice effect, the form of the notice target hold pattern hy changes, and depending on the form of the notice target hold pattern hy that is finally displayed, the result of advance determination based on the hold notice target game information (specifically, possibility of a jackpot gaming state) is suggested.
Here, the expectations of each aspect of the special hold are, in order from the highest jackpot expectation, "red hold", "purple hold", "green hold", and "blue hold" (high hit expectation → jackpot expectation low).

When the suspension notice performance is executed, one or a plurality of suspension change opportunities and suspension change contents corresponding to each suspension change opportunity are set. Then, in the pending notice effect, the state of the notice subject pending symbol hy changes according to the content of the pending change corresponding to the pending change opportunity each time the hold change opportunity comes.
The "holding change opportunity" is a trigger for changing the state of the notice target holding symbol hy. Further, the "holding change content" is a content in which the state of the notice subject holding symbol hy is changed.
In this embodiment, as the pending change opportunity, the start of the variable performance corresponding to each preceding pending information, the start of the variable performance corresponding to the pending notice target game information, etc. are defined. Then, when the suspension notice performance is executed, one or a plurality of suspension change opportunities are set from among these suspension change opportunities.
In this embodiment, the pending notice effect is executed only for the special figure 2 game information among the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information.

(Variation production)
Next, each aspect of the variation performance executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
As described above, on the display screen 31a, the effect symbol display area A in which the effect symbols z1 and z2 corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed, and the effect in which the effect symbols z1 and z2 corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed. It is possible to configure a pattern display area B and the like.
Further, each of the performance symbol display areas A and B includes three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 in which the first performance symbol z1 is displayed, and one second performance symbol display in which the second performance symbol z2 is displayed. and a region a4.
In the following description, in each of the performance symbol display areas A and B, the first performance symbol z1 displayed in the first performance symbol display area a1 is assumed to be the "left symbol", and the first performance symbol z1 displayed in the first performance symbol display area a2. The 1st effect pattern z1 is set as the "middle pattern", and the 1st effect pattern z1 displayed in the 1st effect pattern display area a3 is set as the "right pattern".
In the second effect symbol display area a4 of the effect symbol display areas A and B, the second effect symbol z2 is always variably displayed during execution of the variable effect (first half variable effect and second half variable effect).

First, each aspect of the first half variation production will be described.
In the present embodiment, "pseudo continuous non-continuous variable effect", "pseudo continuous 2 variable effect", and "pseudo continuous 3 variable effect" are defined as the first half variable effect mode (variable effect number).

The "pseudo continuous non-variation performance" includes a normal variation performance.
"Normal variation effect" refers to a display effect in which the first effect symbol z1 is normally variably displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. Specifically, in the normal variation effect, the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern are displayed in normal variation.
"Normal change display" refers to a display in which the types of the first effect symbols z1 displayed at the lottery result display positions of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 are sequentially replaced.
The “lottery result display position” refers to a position where the first effect symbol z1 is stop-displayed in the stop effect described later.
In the "pseudo continuous variable performance", the "normal variable performance" is started in accordance with the start thereof. Then, in the "pseudo-continuous variable effect", the normal variable display of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol ("normal variable effect") is continued until the "pseudo-continuous variable effect" ends.
In addition, in the "pseudo non-continuous variation effect", the pseudo variation effect, which will be described later, is not executed.
"Pseudo-continuous variation effect"("pseudo-continuous 2-variation effect" and "pseudo-continuous 3-variation effect") is that during execution of the variable display of the special symbol once, the variable display of the first effect symbol z1 is simulated. In addition, it is a production that is executed multiple times. Specifically, the pseudo-continuous variation effect is configured including a plurality of times of the pseudo-variation effect.
The "pseudo-continuous 2-fluctuation effect" includes two pseudo-fluctuation effects. The "pseudo-continuous 3-variation performance" includes three pseudo-variation performances.
In the following description, of the pseudo-variation effects included in the pseudo-continuous-variation effects, the final pseudo-variation effect is referred to as the "last-time pseudo-variation effect." In addition, of the pseudo-variation effects included in the pseudo-continuous-variation effects, the pseudo-variation effects of each time excluding the final-time pseudo-variation effect are referred to as "intermediate-time pseudo-variation effects".

Each pseudo-variation performance (halfway pseudo-variation performance and final pseudo-variation performance) includes a normal variation performance, a normal reach-variation performance, and a pseudo-continuous performance.
In the "normal reach fluctuation effect", the first effect symbol z1 is temporarily stopped and displayed in two or more areas out of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and is temporarily stopped and displayed in two or more areas. The combination of the 1st production pattern z1 which has been carried out means the display production|presentation used as the combination contained in a "jackpot pattern."
In the following description, in the normal reach variation effect (or reduced reach variation effect described later), the first effect symbol z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination included in the "big hit symbol" is referred to as the "first It is called production pattern z1”.
Specifically, in the normal reach variation production, the reach state is formed by the left symbol and the right symbol. That is, in the normal reach variation effect, the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the temporarily stopped left and right symbols are of the same type. In addition, in the normal reach fluctuation effect, the normal fluctuation display is continued for the medium symbols.
"Temporary stop display" is a state in which one type of first effect symbol z1 is moved (swinged, rotated, etc.) in a predetermined manner at the lottery result display positions of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. , refers to a display that continues for a predetermined period of time.

The "pseudo-continuous effect" is an effect that arouses whether or not the next pseudo-fluctuation effect will be executed.
The "pseudo-continuous effect" is a type of pseudo-continuous effect that encourages (suggests) whether or not the next pseudo-fluctuation effect will be executed depending on whether or not the pseudo-continuous continuation symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.
The "pseudo continuous continuation symbol" includes information (characters of "NEXT" in the present embodiment) to encourage execution of the next pseudo-variation effect.
In this embodiment, a "pseudo-continuous continuation effect" and a "pseudo-continuous end effect" are defined as the "pseudo-continuous effect".
The "pseudo-continuous continuation effect" is an effect suggesting that the next pseudo-fluctuation effect will be executed after inciting whether or not the next pseudo-fluctuation effect will be executed.
Specifically, in the “pseudo-continuous continuation performance”, a pseudo-continuous continuation symbol (middle symbol) appears as a medium symbol, and the pseudo-continuous continuation symbol moves toward the lottery result display position. At this time, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the pseudo continuous continuation symbol is slower than the moving speed of the first effect symbol z1 in the normal variation display. Then, in the "pseudo-continuous continuation performance", the pseudo-continuous continuation symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. This suggests that the next pseudo-fluctuation effect will be executed.
The "pseudo continuous end effect" is an effect suggesting that the next pseudo-fluctuation effect will not be executed after inciting whether or not the next pseudo-fluctuation effect will be executed.
Specifically, in the "pseudo continuous end effect", as in the pseudo continuous continuous effect, a pseudo continuous continuous pattern (middle symbol) appears as a medium symbol, and the pseudo continuous continuous symbol moves toward the lottery result display position. Moving. At this time, the moving speed of the pseudo continuous continuation symbol is slower than the moving speed of the first effect symbol z1 in the normal variation display. Then, in the "pseudo-continuous end effect", the pseudo-continuous continuation symbol passes through the lottery result display position without being temporarily stopped. This suggests that the next pseudo-fluctuation effect will not be executed.

In the midway pseudo-variation performance of each time, the ready-to-reach variation performance is executed after the normal variation performance is executed according to the start thereof. That is, after the left, middle and right symbols are displayed in normal fluctuation, the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the right and left symbols form the reach state. Then, while the ready-to-win fluctuation effect is being executed (while the ready-to-reach state is being formed), the pseudo-continuous continuous effect is executed.
The intermediate pseudo-fluctuation effect of each round is terminated when the pseudo-continuous continuous effect ends. Then, the next pseudo-variation performance is started according to the end of the pseudo-variation performance on the way.
In the final pseudo-fluctuation performance of each round, the ready-to-reach fluctuation performance is executed after the normal fluctuation performance is executed according to the start thereof. That is, after the left, middle and right symbols are displayed in normal fluctuation, the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the right and left symbols form the reach state. Then, while the ready-to-win fluctuation effect is being executed (while the ready-to-win state is being formed), the pseudo continuous end effect is executed.
The final pseudo-fluctuation effect of each time is terminated according to the end of the pseudo-continuous end effect. Then, according to the end of the final pseudo-variation performance, the latter half variation performance (normal reach variation performance or super reach variation performance) is started.

Next, each aspect of the second half variation production will be described.
In the present embodiment, "non-reach variable effect", "normal reach variable effect", and "super reach variable effect" are defined as the second half variable effect mode (variable effect number).
"Reach-less variable effect" is configured including a normal variable effect as a display effect.
Concretely, in the "non-reach fluctuation production", the "normal fluctuation production" is executed according to the start thereof. That is, the normal fluctuation display of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern is started.
In the "non-reach fluctuation effect", the normal fluctuation display of the left, middle and right symbols ("normal fluctuation effect") is continued until the end of the "non-reach fluctuation effect". Then, the stop effect is started according to the end of the "no-reach variable effect".
In addition, in the non-reach fluctuation production, the reach fluctuation production and the development reach production, which will be described later, are not executed.
"Normal reach variation effect" includes normal reach variation effect.
Specifically, in the "normal reach variation effect", the normal reach variation effect is executed according to the start. That is, the left pattern and the right pattern form the reach state. The normal reach variation effect is terminated when a predetermined time has passed since its start.
"Normal reach variation effect" is terminated when the normal reach variation effect ends. Then, the stop effect is started according to the end of the "normal reach fluctuation effect".
In addition, in the normal reach fluctuation production, the development reach production described later is not executed.

The "super reach variation effect" includes, as display effects, a normal reach change effect, a reduced reach change effect, and an advanced reach change effect.
"Reduced reach fluctuation effect" refers to a display effect in which the first effect pattern z1 forming the reach state is displayed in a reduced size (temporary stop display). In particular, in the reduced reach fluctuation effect, only the first effect pattern z1 forming the reach state is displayed, and the display of the first effect pattern z1 not forming the reach state is omitted. Specifically, in the reduced reach variable display, the right and left symbols forming the reach state are temporarily stopped and displayed in a reduced state, and the medium symbols are not displayed.
The "advanced ready-to-win effect" is an effect that encourages the stop display of the "big hit symbol" in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4. The development reach production is executed during the reach variation production.

In the "super reach variation effect", according to the start, after the normal reach variation effect is executed, the reduced reach change effect is executed.
That is, from the state in which the left pattern and the right pattern form the ready state, the left pattern and the right pattern forming the ready state are reduced, and the reduced left pattern is moved to the upper left end of the display screen 31a and reduced. The drawn right symbol is moved to the upper right end of the display screen 31a, and the display of the middle symbol disappears. At this time, the ready-to-win state is formed by the left symbol and the right symbol that are stop-displayed in the stop effect related to the predetermined stop effect number.
Then, in the "super reach variation effect", the "development reach effect" is executed during the period in which the reduced reach change effect is being executed.
In other words, the "advancement reach effect" is started in accordance with the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the reduced reach fluctuation effect. The "advancement reach effect" ends when a predetermined time has passed since its start.
The "super reach variation effect" is terminated when the "advancement reach effect" ends. Then, the stop effect is started according to the end of the "super reach variation effect".

(main notice production)
In the pachinko machine 1, main notice performance is executed during execution of variable performance.
The "main notice effect" is a effect that is executed during the variable effect, and is a effect that suggests the result of the start determination (special figure hit determination, special symbol pattern determination, special figure variation pattern determination, etc.) related to the variable effect. It has become.
In this embodiment, the main notice effect suggests the result of the special symbol determination (specifically, the possibility of being a "jackpot symbol").
In this embodiment, a plurality of types with different content of effects are defined as the types of the main notice effect.

(Winning performance)
In the pachinko machine 1, winning performance is executed during the occurrence of a big win game state or a small win game state.
The ``winning performance'' is a performance that is executed during the occurrence of the big win game state or the small win game state, and is a performance that suggests the winning type (“big win 1” to “big win 4” or “small win 1”). It's becoming
In this embodiment, winning effects corresponding to each winning type (“big win 1” to “big win 4” and “small win 1”, respectively) are defined.

(Processing executed by production control board 300)
Next, processing executed by the CPU of the effect control board 300 will be described.
(CPU initialization processing)
First, CPU initialization processing executed by the CPU of the effect control board 300 will be described.
A reset circuit (not shown) is arranged on the performance control board 300 . The reset circuit generates a reset signal when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.
The CPU of the effect control board 300 starts CPU initialization processing (not shown) in response to the generation of the reset signal by the reset circuit.
When the CPU initialization process is started, first, various registers, various timers (frame timer, phase timer, etc.), a clock generation circuit, various RAMs, etc. are initialized. Next, an effect random number update process for updating various random numbers for effect is executed. After that, the production random number update process is repeatedly executed until various interrupt processes, which will be described later, are executed.

(Command reception interrupt processing)
Next, command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU of the effect control board 300 executes command reception interrupt processing (not shown) in response to reception of a control command from the main control board 200 .
In the command reception interrupt process, the control command received from the main control board 200 is stored (stored) in the reception buffer area of the RAM of the effect control board 300 .

(Sub timer interrupt processing)
Next, sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing sub timer interrupt processing.
The effect control board 300 is configured including a clock generation circuit. The clock generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal every predetermined period.
The CPU of the effect control board 300 starts sub-timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 50 every predetermined period based on the generation of the clock pulse by the clock generation circuit. When the sub timer interrupt process is started, first, the process moves to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, register saving processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2. In the register saving process, the value of the register is saved in the saving area of the RAM.
In step S31-2, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, various timers (frame timer, phase timer, reset timer, etc.) included in the effect control board 300 are updated.
In step S31-3, command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, the control command stored in the reception buffer of the RAM of the effect control board 300 is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the received control command is executed. The command analysis processing will be described later.

In step S31-4, time schedule management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. The time schedule management process manages the progress of each production.
Here, the ROM of the effect control board 300 corresponds to each effect (each aspect of the variable effect, each aspect of the stop effect, each aspect of the advance notice effect, each aspect of the pre-reading advance notice effect, each aspect of the pending effect, etc.) A production control table is stored.
The "effect control table" is information that defines the progress of effects (display effects, sound effects, lamp effects, movable object effects, etc.).
A plurality of process data are registered in each production control table in chronological order. Each process data contains one or more command information. Each command information is a process of designating the start of a predetermined effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect or movable object effect). In particular, each command information includes information designating the content of the effect to be started (display effect number, sound effect number, lamp effect number or movable object effect number).

In the time schedule management process, an effect control table corresponding to each effect set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300 and an effect management timer corresponding to the effect (an effect management timer for measuring the elapsed time of the effect) ) and the progress of the production is managed.
Specifically, for each effect, out of the process data registered in the effect control table, the process based on the process data corresponding to the current value of the effect management timer is executed. As a result, the command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300 .
At this time, when the command information specifies the start of the display effect, the display effect request information specifying the display effect number included in the command information is stored in the display effect request information storage area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. stored in
On the other hand, when the command information designates the start of a sound effect, the sound effect request information specifying the sound effect number included in the command information is stored in the sound effect request information storage area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. Saved.
On the other hand, when the command information designates the start of the lamp effect, the lamp effect request information specifying the lamp effect number included in the command information is stored in the lamp effect request information storage area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. Saved.
On the other hand, when the command information designates the start of the character production, the character production request information specifying the character production number included in the command information is the character production request in the RAM of the production control board 300. Saved in the information storage area.
As described above, for all the process data registered in the effect control table set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300, the processing based on each process data is sequentially executed.

In step S31-5, register return processing is executed, and the sub timer interrupt processing ends. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S31-1 is restored.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis processing in step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, as shown in FIG. 51, the process proceeds to step S32-1.
In step S32-1, a set value command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the setting value command reception process, it is determined whether or not a subcommand designating a setting value has been received. And when it determines with having received the subcommand which designates a setting value, the setting value which the said subcommand designates is preserve|saved at the predetermined area|region of RAM of the production|presentation control board 300 (storing).

In step S32-2, a game state command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the game state command reception process, it is determined whether or not a game state designation command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the game state designation command has been received, various production flags are set.
In step S32-3, a pending command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4. The pending command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-4, prefetch command reception processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5. The prefetch command reception processing will be described later.
In step S32-5, variation command reception processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6. Variation command reception processing will be described later.
In step S32-6, a stop command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-7. The stop command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-7, an opening command reception process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4). The opening command reception processing will be described later.

(Hold command reception processing)
Next, the pending command reception process of step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing pending command reception processing.
When the hold command reception process is executed in step S32-3, as shown in FIG. 52, the process proceeds to step S36-1.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not the pending number designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the pending number designation command has been received (Yes), the process moves to step S36-2, and the pending number designation command is issued. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S32-4) is performed.
In step S36-2, it is determined whether or not the hold number specifying command specifies an increase in the hold number (the hold number has increased by "1"). If it is determined that there is (Yes), the process moves to step S36-3, and the pending number designation command does not specify an increase in the pending number (designates that the pending number has decreased by "1") If so (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, a pending number addition process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the pending number addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the pending number designation command designates an increase in the special figure 1 pending number.
Then, if it is determined that the pending number designation command specifies an increase in the special figure 1 pending number, the value set in the special figure 1 pending number counter plus "1" is newly added Set to special figure 1 pending number counter. In addition, the normal pending effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 1 game information is set.
For this, an effect control table corresponding to the normal pending effect is read, and the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. - 特許庁At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved design h, among the five display positions included in the reserved design display area b1, a storage area (storage area 0 to A display position corresponding to the storage area 4) is set. Here, the storage area (storage area 0 to storage area 4) in which the newly acquired special figure 1 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special figure 1 reserved number counter.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pending number designation command specifies an increase in the number of special figures 2 pending, the value set in the special figure 2 pending number counter plus "1" is newly added Set to special figure 2 pending number counter. In addition, the normal pending effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 2 game information is set.
For this, an effect control table corresponding to the normal pending effect is read, and the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. - 特許庁At this time, as the display area for displaying the reserved design h, among the five display positions included in the reserved design display area b2, the storage area in which the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is stored (storage area 0 to A display position corresponding to the storage area 4) is set. Here, the storage area (storage area 0 to storage area 4) in which the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter.

In step S36-4, a reservation number subtraction process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the reservation number subtraction process, first, it is determined whether or not the reservation number designation command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 1 reservation number.
Then, if it is determined that the reservation number designation command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 1 reservation number, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 1 reservation number counter is newly Set to special figure 1 pending number counter. Also, the display position of each reserved design h displayed in the reserved design display area b1 is shifted (moved).
Specifically, the pending effect corresponding to the pending symbol h displayed at the position corresponding to the storage area 0 in the pending symbol display area b1 is ended. As a result, the display of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the finished reserved effect is terminated.
Further, when the reserved pattern h is displayed in the position corresponding to the storage area 1 in the reserved pattern display area b1, the display position of the reserved pattern h is changed from the position corresponding to the storage area 1 to the storage area. Shift to the position corresponding to 0.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed in the position corresponding to the storage area 2 in the reserved design display area b1, the display position of the reserved design h is changed from the position corresponding to the storage area 2 to the storage area. Shift to the position corresponding to 1.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed in the position corresponding to the storage area 3 in the reserved design display area b1, the display position of the reserved design h is changed from the position corresponding to the storage area 3 to the storage area. Shift to the position corresponding to 2.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed in the position corresponding to the storage area 4 in the reserved design display area b1, the display position of the reserved design h is changed from the position corresponding to the storage area 4 to the storage area. Shift to the position corresponding to 3.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pending number designation command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 2 pending number, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 2 pending number counter is newly Set to special figure 2 pending number counter. Also, the display position of each reserved design h displayed in the reserved design display area b2 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the pending effect corresponding to the pending symbol h displayed at the position corresponding to the storage area 0 in the pending symbol display area b2 is ended. As a result, the display of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the finished reserved effect is terminated.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed in the position corresponding to the storage area 1 in the reserved design display area b2, the display position of the reserved design h is shifted from the position corresponding to the storage area 1 to the storage area. Shift to the position corresponding to 0.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed in the position corresponding to the storage area 2 in the reserved design display area b2, the display position of the reserved design h is changed from the position corresponding to the storage area 2 to the storage area. Shift to the position corresponding to 1.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed in the position corresponding to the storage area 3 in the reserved design display area b2, the display position of the reserved design h is changed from the position corresponding to the storage area 3 to the storage area. Shift to the position corresponding to 2.
Further, when the reserved design h is displayed in the position corresponding to the storage area 4 in the reserved design display area b2, the display position of the reserved design h is changed from the position corresponding to the storage area 4 to the storage area. Shift to the position corresponding to 3.

(Prefetch command reception processing)
Next, the prefetch command reception processing in step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing prefetch command reception processing.
When the prefetch command reception process is executed in step S32-4, as shown in FIG. 53, the process proceeds to step S33-1.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not a prefetching designation command (first prefetching designation command, second prefetching designation command, and third prefetching designation command) has been received, and if it is determined that a prefetching designation command has been received (Yes ), the process proceeds to step S33-2, and when it is determined that the prefetch designation command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, prefetch information analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the look-ahead information analysis process, the information specified by the look-ahead specification command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300 as pending information.
The RAM of the effect control board 300 is set with a pending information storage area capable of storing pending information. In addition, as a reservation information storage area, a first reservation information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 game information storage area of RAM 230) and a second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 game information storage area of RAM 230) ) is set.
The first pending information storage area includes storage areas 0 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing pending information. And, in the first pending information storage area, pending information corresponding to the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area is stored.
That is, the pending information stored in the storage area 0 of the first pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 0 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. The pending information stored in the storage area 1 of the first pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 2 of the first pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 3 of the first pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 4 of the first pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area.
The second pending information storage area includes storage areas 0 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing pending information. And, in the second pending information storage area, pending information corresponding to the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area is stored.
That is, the pending information stored in the storage area 0 of the second pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 0 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. The pending information stored in the storage area 1 of the second pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 2 of the second pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 2 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 3 of the second pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Further, the pending information stored in the storage area 4 of the second pending information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 4 of the special figure 2 game information storage area.
Each of the pending information includes pattern information indicating the type of stop pattern, the first variation information indicating the contents of the variation mode ("variation mode number" or "indefinite value"), and the contents of the variation pattern ("variation pattern number" or and second variation information indicating "indefinite value").

In the look-ahead information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
Then, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special design lottery, the type of stop design specified by the first look-ahead designation command ("lost design", "jackpot design 1 " ~ "big hit pattern 3" or "small hit pattern 1"), the contents of the variation mode specified by the second look-ahead specification command ("variation mode m" or "undefined value"), and the third look-ahead specification command is specified The content of the variation pattern (“variation pattern n” or “undefined value”) is analyzed, and the symbol information corresponding to the type of the analyzed stop symbol and the first variation information corresponding to the contents of the analyzed variation mode and the second variation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation pattern. Then, the generated pending information is stored (saved) in the first pending information storage area.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of stop design specified by the first look-ahead designation command ("lost design", "jackpot design 1 " ~ "big hit pattern 4" or "small hit pattern 1"), the contents of the variation mode specified by the second look-ahead specification command ("variation mode m" or "undefined value"), and the third look-ahead specification command is specified The content of the variation pattern (“variation pattern n” or “undefined value”) is analyzed, and the symbol information corresponding to the type of the analyzed stop symbol and the first variation information corresponding to the contents of the analyzed variation mode and the second variation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation pattern. Then, the generated pending information is stored (saved) in the second pending information storage area.
In the following description, the pending information stored in the pending information storage area in step S33-2 is referred to as "prefetch target pending information". In addition, among the pending information stored in the first pending information storage area, the pending information whose notification display (variable display and stop display) is executed prior to the prefetch target pending information is referred to as "preceding pending information".

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4, and the pre-reading notice effect is executed. If it is determined that the process is being executed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, "1" is set in the flag area during the prefetching notice effect of the RAM of the effect control board 300 during execution of the prefetching notice effect. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed based on whether or not "1" is set in the pre-reading notice effect in-progress flag area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. .
In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5, and the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is not satisfied (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, (1) the prefetch target hold information is the hold information corresponding to the special figure 2 game information, (2) a predetermined number (in this embodiment, "2") or more preceding hold information is stored (3) that there is no preceding hold information indicating the type (variation pattern number) belonging to "normal reach variation" or "super reach variation" as the type of variation pattern, (4) during stop of time saving control (5) that the big winning game state or the small winning game state is not occurring, it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied.
It should be noted that the content of the look-ahead advance notice effect execution condition can be changed as appropriate. That is, not all the conditions (1) to (5) above, but in the case of one or more conditions among the above (1) to (5), as a configuration that is determined to meet the pre-reading notice effect execution condition I don't mind. Further, conditions different from the conditions (1) to (5) above may be included as conditions for executing the pre-reading advance notice effect.

In step S33-5, a pre-reading notice effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the pre-reading notice effect lottery process, a pre-reading notice effect lottery is executed for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect lottery.
The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a pre-reading notice effect lottery table in which hit values of the pre-reading notice effect lottery are registered.
In the pre-reading notice effect lottery process, first, a pre-reading notice effect lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the obtained pre-reading notice effect lottery random number and the pre-reading notice effect lottery table.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect lottery executed in step S33-5 has been won. If it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect lottery has been lost (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

At step S33-7, a pre-reading notice effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the pre-reading notice effect setting process, the content of the pre-reading notice effect (holding notice effect) is set.
Specifically, in the pre-reading announcement effect setting process, first, the pending final mode selection process is executed. In the final pending mode selection process, the final pending mode is selected and set.
The "final pending mode" refers to the mode of the pending notice target pattern hy that finally changes in the pending advance notice effect.
The ROM of the effect control board 300 stores a final pending color lottery table in which the correspondence between the final pending mode lottery random number and the final pending mode is registered.
In addition, as the final holding mode lottery table, the final holding mode lottery table corresponding to each type of variation pattern is stored.
In the final pending mode selection process, first, a final pending mode lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation pattern indicated by the prefetch target suspension information is confirmed, and the suspension final mode lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, the final pending mode is selected (determined) based on the acquired final pending mode lottery random number and the read final pending mode lottery table.

In the look-ahead notice effect setting process, next, a pending change opportunity selection process is executed. In the pending change trigger selection process, a pending change trigger is selected and set.
The ROM of the effect control board 300 stores a hold change opportunity lottery table in which correspondence between a hold change opportunity lottery random number and a hold change pattern is registered.
The "holding change pattern" is information (scenario data) specifying a combination of holding change triggers.
In addition, as a hold change opportunity lottery table, a hold change opportunity lottery table corresponding to each combination of the special figure 2 hold number ("2" to "4") and the hold final mode is stored.
In the pending change opportunity selection process, first, a pending change opportunity lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the special figure 2 reservation number and the reservation final mode selected in the reservation final mode selection process are confirmed, and the reservation change opportunity lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, based on the acquired pending change opportunity lottery random number and the read pending change opportunity lottery table, the pending change pattern is determined (judged). Then, according to the determined pending change pattern, one or a plurality of pending change opportunities related to the relevant pending notice effect are set.

In the look-ahead notice effect setting process, next, a pending change content selection process is executed. In the pending change content selection process, the pending change content corresponding to each pending change trigger is selected and set.
Specifically, in the pending change content selection process, as the pending change content corresponding to each pending change opportunity, there are a mode of the notice subject pending pattern hy before the change and a mode of the notice subject pending pattern hy after the change. set.
In the present embodiment, among the one or more hold change opportunities set in the hold change opportunity selection process, each hold change opportunity is selected in order from the hold change opportunity that arrives (occurs) later (later hold change opportunity). A pending change content corresponding to the change trigger is selected.
For example, if 3 [times] hold change trigger is set in the hold change trigger selection process, the third (final) hold change trigger, the second hold change trigger, and the first hold change trigger are performed in this order. , the hold change content corresponding to each hold change trigger is selected.
In addition, when selecting the content of the pending change corresponding to the pending change opportunity of each time, first, the aspect of the notice subject pending pattern hy after the change is selected, and then the aspect of the notice subject pending pattern hy before the change is selected. selected. At this time, as the mode of the notice target reserved design hy before the change, a mode with a lower degree of expectation than the mode of the notice target reserved design hy after the change is determined. As a result, the mode of the notice target retained pattern hy changes (promotes) to a mode with a high degree of expectation in accordance with the arrival of each pending change opportunity.
The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a pending change content lottery table in which the correspondence between the pending change content lottery random number and the mode of the notice target pending symbol hy before the change is registered.
Further, as a pending change content lottery table, a pending change content lottery table corresponding to each mode of the pending pattern h (mode of the notice subject pending pattern hy after change) is stored.
Then, in the pending change content lottery table corresponding to each aspect of the reserved pattern h (aspect of the notice subject reserved pattern hy after change), the notice subject reserved pattern hy after change is selected as the aspect of the notice subject reserved pattern hy before change. Only modes with low expectations are registered compared to the mode of .
In the pending change content selection process, first, among the pending change triggers set in the pending change trigger selection process, the pending change details are selected for the final pending change trigger. For this, first, the mode of the notice subject pending symbol hy after the change related to the final pending change trigger is selected. At this time, the final pending mode selected in the final pending mode selection process is selected as the mode of the notice target pending pattern hy after the change related to the final pending change opportunity. Next, the mode of the notice subject pending symbol hy before the change related to the final pending change opportunity is selected. For this, first, a pending change content lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the holding change content lottery table corresponding to the form of the notice target holding pattern hy after the change selected for the holding change opportunity of the final round is read. Then, based on the obtained pending change content lottery random number and the read pending change content lottery table, the state of the pre-notification target pending symbol hy related to the final pending change trigger is selected.
In the pending change content selection process, next, the pending change contents are selected for each pending change opportunity excluding the final pending change opportunity among the pending change opportunities set in the pending change opportunity selection process. At this time, the hold change contents corresponding to each hold change opportunity are determined in order from the hold change opportunity that arrives later.
In order to determine the content of the pending change corresponding to each pending change opportunity, first, the aspect of the notice subject pending pattern hy after the change related to the relevant pending change opportunity is determined. At this time, the mode of the pre-change notice subject reserved pattern hy already selected for the next pending change opportunity is selected as the mode of the notice subject reserved pattern hy after change related to the current pending change opportunity. Next, the aspect of the notice object pending symbol hy before the change related to the present pending change opportunity is determined. For this, first, a pending change content lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the holding change content lottery table corresponding to the mode of the notice target holding pattern hy after the change selected for the current holding change opportunity is read. Then, based on the obtained pending change content lottery random number and the read pending change content lottery table, the aspect of the pre-notification subject pending symbol hy related to the present pending change opportunity is selected.
In the pending change content selection process, next, the pending change content selected for each pending change trigger is set in association with the pending change trigger. Thereby, according to the arrival of each hold change opportunity, the state of the notice target hold pattern hy is changed (promoted) according to the hold change contents set for the hold change opportunity.

In the pre-reading notice effect setting process, next, “1” is set in the pre-reading notice effect in-progress flag area of the RAM of the effect control board 300 .
As described above, the suspension notice effect is started.
In addition, by a process (not shown), "0" is set in the pre-reading notice effect in-progress flag area of the RAM of the effect control board 300 according to the end of the pending notice effect.

(variation command reception processing)
Next, the variation command reception process of step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing variation command reception processing.
When the variation command reception process is executed in step S32-5, as shown in FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S34-1.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined control command has been received. If it is determined that a predetermined control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2, and the predetermined control command is transmitted. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control command refers to a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command and a variation pattern designation command.
In step S34-2, stop effect determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, a stop effect number (mode of stop effect) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, a stop effect number (mode of stop effect) is determined based on the type of stop symbol specified by the symbol type designation command. Then, the determined stop effect number is stored in the stop effect number storage area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. - 特許庁At this time, when the symbol type designation command corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is received, the determined stop effect number is changed to the stop effect number corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) Save to storage. On the other hand, when the symbol type designation command corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is received, the determined stop effect number is stored as the stop effect number corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information). Save to area.

In step S34-3, a variable effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the variable effect determination process, a variable effect number (mode of variable effect) is determined.
Concretely, in fluctuation production decision processing, first, first half fluctuation production decision processing which decides the first half fluctuation production number (mode of first half fluctuation production) is executed.
A ROM of a performance control board 300 stores a first half variable performance lottery table in which correspondence between a variable mode number (type of variable mode) and a first half variable performance number (mode of first half variable performance) is registered.
In the first half variation performance determination process, first, the first half variation performance lottery table is read. Then, among the first half variation performance numbers registered in the first half variation performance lottery table, the first half variation performance number corresponding to the variation mode number specified by the variation mode designation command is determined (selected).

In the variable effect determination process, next, the second half variable effect determination process for determining the second half variable effect number (mode of the second half variable effect) is executed.
A ROM of a performance control board 300 stores a second half variable performance lottery table in which correspondence between a variation pattern number (variation pattern type) and a second half variable performance number (mode of second half variable performance) is registered.
In the second half variation performance determination process, first, the second half variation performance lottery table is read. Then, out of the second half variation performance numbers registered in the second half variation performance lottery table, the second half variation performance number corresponding to the variation pattern number designated by the variation pattern designation command is determined (selected).

In step S34-4, a notice effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. In the announcement effect determination process, a main announcement effect number (mode of main announcement effect) is selected.
The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a preliminary announcement performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the preliminary announcement performance lottery random number and the main preliminary announcement performance number (mode of the main preliminary performance) is registered.
Further, as a notice effect lottery table, a notice effect lottery table corresponding to each stop symbol number (various types of stop symbols) is stored.
In order to determine the aspect of the main notice effect, first, a notice effect lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the stop symbol number designated by the stop symbol designation command is confirmed, and the notice effect lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the main notice effect lottery number is determined (judged) based on the obtained notice effect lottery random number and the read-out notice effect lottery table.

In step S34-5, a variable effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variable performance setting process, a performance control table for variable performance is set.
Specifically, in the variable effect setting process, the effect control table corresponding to the first half variable effect number determined in step S34-3 and the effect control table corresponding to the second half variable effect number determined in step S34-3 are set. read out.
Next, the read production control table is synthesized to generate the production control table for the variable production. Then, the generated effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area of the RAM of the effect control board 300 .
At this time, when the symbol type designation command corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is received, the generated effect control table is changed to the effect control table corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) Set in the setting area. As a result, in the production pattern display area A, the variable production (variation display of the production patterns z1 and z2) is started.
On the other hand, when the symbol type designation command corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is received, the generated effect control table is set to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information). Set to area. As a result, in the production pattern display area B, the variable production (variation display of the production patterns z1 and z2) is started.
Also, the effect control table corresponding to the main notice effect number determined in step S34-4 is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area of the RAM of the effect control board 300 . As a result, the main notice effect is started at a predetermined timing during execution of the variable effect.

(Stop command reception processing)
Next, the stop command reception process of step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing stop command reception processing.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, as shown in FIG. 55, the process proceeds to step S35-1.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not a stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that a stop designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2, where the stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is no (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, a stop effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7). In the stop effect setting process, a stop effect control table is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, when the stop designation command corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is received, the stop effect number storage corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) The stop effect number stored in the area is acquired, and the effect control table corresponding to the acquired stop effect number is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information). As a result, the stop effect (stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2) is started in the effect symbol display area A.
On the other hand, in the stop effect setting process, when the stop designation command corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is received, the stop effect number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) Acquire the stored stop effect number and read out the effect control table corresponding to the acquired stop effect number. Then, the read effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information). As a result, the stop effect (stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2) is started in the effect symbol display area B.

(Opening command reception processing)
Next, the opening command reception processing of step S32-7 will be described.
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing opening command reception processing.
When the opening command reception process is executed in step S32-7, as shown in FIG. 56, the process proceeds to step S39-1.
In step S39-1, it is determined whether or not an opening designation command has been received, and if it is determined that an opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-2, where the opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is no (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S31-4) is performed.
In step S39-2, a winning effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4). In the winning effect setting process, a winning effect effect control table is set.
Specifically, in the winning effect setting process, the effect control table corresponding to the type of stop symbol specified by the opening specifying command is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area of the RAM of the effect control board 300 . Thus, the winning effect is started.

(Operation of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, when the setting change condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the setting change state is generated after the RAM clearing initialization process (step S1-30) is executed. While the setting change state is occurring, the setting value stored in the setting value area can be changed by depressing the RAM clear switch 207 . Further, when the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, a game ready state is generated instead of the setting change state, and the game can be progressed.
Here, in the RAM clearing initialization process, a predetermined area of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized). At this time, in the RAM clearing initialization process, the special figure 1 display pattern counter, the special figure 2 display pattern counter, and the general figure display pattern counter are included as objects to be cleared (initialized).
Therefore, when the RAM clearing initialization process is executed, as the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the value (initial value) corresponding to the "missing symbol" corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set, and the special figure As the value of the 2 display symbol counter, the value (initial value) corresponding to the "missing symbol" corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set, and as the value of the normal symbol lottery, the "missing symbol" corresponding to the normal symbol lottery is set. ” (initial value) is set.
Thereby, when the set value stored in the set value area is changed when the power is turned on, the special figure 1 display device corresponds to the first special symbol lottery when the playable state is generated thereafter. The "missing pattern" is displayed, the "missing pattern" corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is displayed on the special figure 2 display device, and the "missing pattern" corresponding to the normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal figure display device. will be

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the game-enabled state is generated after the power-return initialization process (step S1-15) is executed, and the game can be played. .
Here, in the power recovery initialization process, a predetermined area in the use area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized). At this time, in the initialization process at the time of power return, the special figure 1 display pattern counter, the special figure 2 display pattern counter, and the general figure display pattern counter are not included as objects to be cleared (initialized).
Therefore, when the power is turned on, if the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed down, the special figure 1 display pattern counter, the special figure 2 display pattern counter, and the general figure display pattern counter are the values of each counter. The hour value is preserved.
Thereby, when the power is turned on, if the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed down, then when the game possible state is generated, the special figure 1 display device reproduces (maintains) the display of the pattern when the power is cut off. Then, in the special figure 2 display device, the display of the design at the time of power cutoff is reproduced (maintained), and in the general figure display device, the display of the design at the time of power cutoff is reproduced (maintained).

When the power is turned on, the player changes the setting value stored in the setting value area based on the display modes of the special figure 1 display device, the special figure 2 display device, and the general figure display device. There is a possibility that it will be possible to determine whether or not
That is, the player, when the power is turned on, in at least one of the special figure 1 display device, the special figure 2 display device, and the general figure display device, in at least one display device, a symbol other than the "missing pattern" is displayed In this case, it is possible to determine that the set value stored in the set value area has not been changed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, when the symbol initialization condition is satisfied, the value of each counter is cleared (initialized) for the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the general figure display symbol counter. It is configured to be That is, when the symbol initialization condition is satisfied, the display mode of each display device for the special figure 1 display device, the special figure 2 display device, and the general figure display device is forced to the "off pattern". It's becoming
Specifically, when the symbol initialization condition is satisfied, in the power recovery initialization process, the value of each counter for the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the general figure display symbol counter is cleared (initialized).
That is, as the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter, a value (initial value) corresponding to the "missing symbol" corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set, and as the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter, the second special symbol A value (initial value) corresponding to the "missing design" corresponding to the lottery is set, and a value (initial value) corresponding to the "missing design" corresponding to the normal design lottery is set as the value of the normal pattern display symbol counter. be.
Here, in the present embodiment, as the symbol initialization condition, "a state in which the special game is not being executed (a state in which the special game is stopped), and a state in which the normal game is not being executed (a normal game is It is stipulated that the
That is, (1) in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area, a value corresponding to "special figure 1 fluctuation waiting state" is set, (2) in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area, "special figure (3) A value corresponding to the "special electric accessory non-operating state" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, (4 ) The value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter = "0", (5) The value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter = "0", (6) In the normal game phase flag area, "normal figure fluctuation A value corresponding to "waiting state" is set, (7) A value corresponding to "ordinary electric accessory non-operating state" is set in the game phase flag area at the time of normal figure winning, (8) It is determined that the design initialization condition is satisfied when all the conditions of the value of the normal pattern pending number counter = "0" are satisfied.
On the other hand, if at least one of the above conditions (1) to (8) is not satisfied, it is determined that the symbol initialization condition is not satisfied.

As described above, when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed down, by satisfying the symbol initialization condition, in the special figure 1 display device, the "lost symbol" corresponding to the first special symbol lottery ' is displayed, the ``missing pattern'' corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is displayed on the special figure 2 display device, and the ``losing pattern'' corresponding to the normal symbol lottery is displayed on the general pattern display device.
Therefore, in the player, when the power is turned on, based on the display mode of the special figure 1 display device, the special figure 2 display device, and the general figure display device, Whether the setting value stored in the setting value area has been changed It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is possible to determine whether
In particular, only when the game is not being executed, in the initialization process at the time of power return, the value of each counter for the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the general figure display symbol counter is cleared (initialized), it is possible to avoid a situation in which the fairness of the game is impaired.

(Action of pachinko machine 1)
In the pachinko machine 1, when the setting value is changed, the display mode of the display means (special figure 1 display device, special figure 2 display device, and normal figure display device) is changed to a predetermined display mode ("lost pattern") becomes. In particular, even if the set value is not changed, when the predetermined condition (symbol initialization condition) is established, the display mode of the display means (special figure 1 display device, special figure 2 display device, and normal figure display device) becomes a predetermined display mode (“lost pattern”).
Thereby, even if the setting value is not changed, by establishing a predetermined condition (symbol initialization condition), the display means (special figure 1 display device, special figure 2 display device, and normal figure display device) can be set to the same display mode as when the setting value is changed (“missing pattern”).
Therefore, in the player, based on the display mode of the display means (special figure 1 display device, special figure 2 display device, and general figure display device), it is impossible to determine whether the set value has been changed becomes.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the enjoyment of playing the game while predicting the set values, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Modification 1)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, various modifications can be made to the above embodiments.
For example, in the above embodiment, when the symbol initialization condition is satisfied, the value of each counter is cleared (initialized) for the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the general figure display symbol counter. (For the special figure 1 display device, the special figure 2 display device, and the general figure display device, the display mode of each display device is forced to the "missing pattern").
At this time, as the symbol initialization condition, when the power is restored, (1) in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area, a value corresponding to "special figure 1 fluctuation waiting state" is set, (2) special figure 2 In the special game phase flag area, a value corresponding to "special figure 2 fluctuation waiting state" is set, (3) in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, it corresponds to "special electric auditors non-operating state" (4) the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter = "0", (5) the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter = "0", (6) In the normal game phase flag area, a value corresponding to "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state" is set, (7) in the normal pattern winning game phase flag area, corresponding to "normal electric auditors non-operating state" It is defined that the value is set and that all the conditions of (8) the value of the normal figure pending number counter = "0" are satisfied.
However, the contents of the symbol initialization conditions can be changed as appropriate.
For example, among the above conditions (1) to (8), the conditions (3) and (7) need not be included as the symbol initialization conditions.
Alternatively, the symbol initialization conditions may not include the conditions (6) to (8) among the conditions (1) to (8).
Or, as a pattern initialization condition, "lottery (special pattern hit judgment or normal pattern hit and drop judgment) determines "missing" (loss), and the fluctuation display of the pattern (special pattern or normal pattern) corresponding to the lottery is terminated (stop display is started)".

(Modification 2)
Further, in the above embodiment, one symbol initialization condition is defined for the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the general figure display symbol counter. And, when one symbol initialization condition is established, the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the general figure display symbol counter are cleared (initialized).
However, for the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the general figure display symbol counter, the symbol initialization conditions are defined for each counter, and when the symbol initialization conditions corresponding to each counter are established Alternatively, the counter may be cleared (initialized).
For example, as the symbol initialization condition corresponding to the special figure 1 display symbol counter (special figure 1 display device), a value corresponding to "special figure 1 fluctuation waiting state" is set in the "special figure 1 special game phase flag area" And, in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to "special electric auditors non-operating state" is set, and the value of the special figure 1 reserved number counter = "0" ”.
In addition, as the symbol initialization condition corresponding to the special figure 2 display symbol counter (special figure 2 display device), the value corresponding to the "special figure 2 fluctuation waiting state" is set in the "special figure 2 special game phase flag area" And, in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to "special electric auditors non-operating state" is set, and the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter = "0" ”.
Furthermore, as a pattern initialization condition corresponding to the general pattern display symbol counter (normal pattern display device), a value corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation waiting state is set in the normal game phase flag area, and In the figure winning game phase flag area, a value corresponding to "normal electric auditors non-operating state" is set, and the value of the normal figure reservation number counter = "0".
Then, in the initialization process at the time of power return, for each of the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the general figure display symbol counter, whether the symbol initialization condition corresponding to the counter is satisfied If it is determined that the pattern initialization condition is satisfied, the counter is cleared (initialized).

(Modification 3)
Further, in the above embodiment, the notification display of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device (variation display and stop display), the notification display of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device (variation display and stop display) and , can be executed simultaneously (at the same time) in parallel.
However, the notification display of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device (variation display and stop display) and the notification display of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device (variation display and stop display) are at the same time (same ) may be configured so that they are not executed in parallel.
That is, the big hit game state or the small hit game state is not occurring, and the notification display (variation display or stop display) of the first special symbol is not being executed, and the notification display (variation display) of the second special symbol Or stop display) when not in execution, special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area, and special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area , one piece of game information may be selected, and the start determination may be executed based on the selected piece of game information.

In such a configuration, it is preferable that the special game phase is managed based on one special game phase flag area.
That is, as a phase (hereinafter referred to as "special game phase") related to the game based on special symbols, "special figure fluctuation waiting state", "special figure fluctuation state", "special figure stop symbol display state", ``Large winning opening before opening state at the time of big win'', ``Large winning opening opening control state at the time of big winning'', ``Large winning opening closed effective state at the time of big winning'', ``Waiting state for ending the opening of the big winning prize at the time of big winning'', and `` State before opening the big winning opening at the time of the small win", "Control state for opening the big winning opening at the time of the small winning", "Effective state of closing the big winning opening at the time of the small winning", and "Wait state for ending the opening of the big winning opening at the time of the small winning" and
Also, in the RAM 230, one special game phase flag area is provided.
Then, in the special game phase flag area, "special figure fluctuation waiting state", "special figure fluctuation state", "special figure stop symbol display state", "big win state before big winning opening opening state", "big win at big win" Mouth opening control state", "Big winning mouth closed effective state at the time of big win", "Wait state for ending the opening of big winning mouth at the time of big win", "State before opening the big winning mouth at the time of small win", "Big winning mouth open control at the time of small win"state","effective state of closing the big winning opening at the time of small winning", and "waiting state for closing the opening of the big winning opening at the time of small winning", the value corresponding to one special game phase (special game phase flag) is set (stored) The configuration shall be such that
Furthermore, the ROM 220 stores a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase as a special game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the special game.
Then, in the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area is selected, and a process based on the selected special game control module is executed.
This makes it possible to manage the progress of the special game based on the value set in the special game phase flag area.

Similarly, based on one normal game phase flag area, it may be configured such that the normal game phase is managed.
That is, as a phase related to the game based on normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phase"), "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state", "normal pattern fluctuation state", "normal pattern stop symbol display state", "Normal electric accessory open pre-open state", "normal electric accessory open control state", "ordinary electric accessory closed effective state", and "normal electric accessory open end wait state" are defined.
Also, in the RAM 230, one normal game phase flag area is provided.
Then, in the normal game phase flag area, "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state", "normal pattern fluctuation state", "normal pattern stop symbol display state", "normal electric role object open state", "normal electric role object open A configuration in which a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one normal game phase is set (stored) out of "control state", "normal electric role product closed effective state" and "normal electric role product open end wait state" and
Furthermore, the ROM 220 stores a normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the normal game.
Then, in the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area is selected, and the process based on the normal game control module selected is executed.
This makes it possible to manage the progress of the normal game based on the value set in the normal game phase flag area.

In particular, in the case of the above configuration, the symbol initialization conditions are (a) that a value corresponding to the "special figure fluctuation waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area, and (b) The value of the special figure 1 reserved number counter = "0", and (c) the value of the special figure 2 reserved number counter = "0", (d) in the normal game phase flag area, "normal figure A value corresponding to "variation waiting state" is set, and (e) the value of the normal pattern pending number counter = "0".

(Modification 4)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, during the occurrence of the big winning game state, the measurement of the effective time for closing the big winning opening is started according to the end of the final round game, and when the effective time for closing the big winning opening has passed. Accordingly, the measurement of the ending time is started, and when the ending time elapses, the jackpot game state is terminated ("special electric accessory non-operating state" is set), thereby causing a change in the special symbol. Display can be started.
However, during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, according to the end of the final round game, the effective time for closing the big winning opening and the ending time are simultaneously (simultaneously) started to be measured. I don't mind.
With such a configuration, the effective time for closing the big winning slot and the ending time can be consumed simultaneously (simultaneously) in parallel, and as a result, it is possible to improve the tempo of the special game. Become.
Here, even in the case of such a configuration, the jackpot game state is ended ("special electric role product non-operating state" is set) according to the passing of the ending time, and thereby, the special symbol fluctuates. Display can be started.
As a result, if a time longer than the ending time is specified as the valid time for closing the big winning mouth, even during the period when the "special electric accessory non-operating state" is set, the closing of the big winning mouth There is a possibility that the effective time is being measured. That is, although the "special electric role product non-operating state" is set, there is a possibility that the game related to the special electric role product 54a is progressing.
Therefore, in the case of such a configuration, in addition to the above conditions (1) to (8), the symbol initialization condition is "the value of the timer for measuring the valid time for closing the big winning opening =" 0 ". It is preferable to stipulate that (not during the measurement of the valid time for closing the big winning opening)”.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, during the occurrence of the normal game per game state, measurement of the normal electric role closing effective time is started in response to the end of opening of the normal electric role product 53a, and the normal electric role closing effective time According to the fact that it has elapsed, the measurement of the open end wait time is started, and according to the elapse of the open end wait time, the game state per normal figure ends ("Normal electric accessories inactive state" is set ), which makes it possible to start variable display of normal symbols.
However, during the occurrence of the normal game state, the normal electric role closing valid time and the open end waiting time are measured simultaneously (simultaneously) in parallel in response to the end of the normal electric accessory 53a. It does not matter if the configuration is started.
In the case of such a configuration, the normal electric closing effective time and the open end waiting time can be consumed at the same time (simultaneously) in parallel, and as a result, the tempo of the normal game can be improved. It becomes possible.
Here, even in the case of such a configuration, in response to the lapse of the open end wait time, the game state per normal figure is ended ("normal electric accessory non-operating state" is set), thereby, It is possible to start variable display of normal symbols.
Then, if a time longer than the open end wait ending time is specified as the normal electric closing valid time, even during the period when the "normal electric accessory non-operating state" is set, normal There is a risk that the effective time for closing the power supply is being measured. That is, there is a possibility that the game related to the normal electric accessory 53a is progressing even though the "normal electric accessory non-operating state" is set.
Therefore, in the case of such a configuration, in addition to the above conditions (1) to (8), as the symbol initialization condition, "the value of the timer for measuring the normal electric power closing effective time =" 0 " It is preferable to stipulate that the

(Modification 5)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the CPU of the main control board 200 executes the RAM clearing initialization process (step S1-30) (when the setting fluctuation state occurs), the CPU of the effect control board 300 Alternatively, the display mode of the main image display device 31 (display screen 31) may be controlled to a predetermined mode (for example, a stop symbol corresponding to a "lost symbol").
Then, even when the CPU of the main control board 200 does not execute the RAM clear time initialization process (step S1-30) (even when the setting fluctuation state does not occur), the symbol initialization condition is When established, the CPU of the effect control board 300 controls the display mode of the main image display device 31 (display screen 31) to the predetermined mode (for example, the stop symbol corresponding to the "lost symbol"). I don't mind.

1 pachinko machine 31 main image display device 60 main display device 200 main control board 300 effect control board

Claims (1)

a lottery means for executing a lottery according to the set value;
a display means that becomes a predetermined display mode after staying in a predetermined mode related to the set value,
When a predetermined condition is established without staying in the predetermined mode at power-on , the display mode of the display means changes to the predetermined display mode instead of the display mode based on the backed up information ,
A gaming machine, wherein, when power is turned on, if a predetermined condition is not established without staying in the predetermined mode, the display mode of the display means changes to a display mode based on backed up information.

Images